Grand Cherokee (2021) - Car JEEP - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Owner's Manual
Brand	Jeep
Model	Grand Cherokee (2021)
Category	Car
Number of Pages	432
Language	English
Available Formats	PDF (free download)
Engine Options	3.6L V6, 5.7L V8 (If Equipped)
Transmission	8-Speed Automatic
Drive System	Four-Wheel Drive (Quadra-Trac I/II, Quadra-Drive II)
Key Features	Keyless Enter-N-Go, Remote Start, Uconnect 5 Multimedia, Adaptive Cruise Control, Blind Spot Monitoring, LaneSense, ParkSense, Quadra-Lift Air Suspension, Selec-Terrain, Off-Road Pages
Safety Systems	Airbags (Front, Side, Curtain), ABS, Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision Warning, Tire Pressure Monitoring System, ParkView Rear Backup Camera
Maintenance Intervals	Oil change every 6,000 miles or 6 months (severe service), tire rotation every 6,000 miles
Recommended Engine Oil	SAE 0W-20 (3.6L), SAE 5W-20 (5.7L) – API Certified
Coolant Capacity	3.6L: 10.4 qt (9.8 L), 5.7L: 11.5 qt (10.9 L)
Fuel Tank Capacity	24.6 gal (93.1 L)
Towing Capacity (Max)	Up to 7,200 lb (3,266 kg) (with proper equipment)
Spare Parts	Genuine Mopar parts available through authorized dealers
Cleaning Recommendations	Use mild soap and water; avoid harsh chemicals. Leather seats: use Mopar leather cleaner.
Warranty	Complimentary printed copy available; details in Warranty Booklet

Frequently Asked Questions - Grand Cherokee (2021) JEEP

How do I remote start my Jeep Grand Cherokee?

Press and release the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. The engine will start and run for 15 minutes. To drive, unlock the doors, get in, press the brake pedal, and push the START/STOP ignition button.

What type of engine oil should I use?

For the 3.6L engine, use SAE 0W-20; for the 5.7L engine, use SAE 5W-20. Both must meet API Certified standards.

How often should I change the oil?

Under normal conditions, every 6,000 miles or 6 months, whichever comes first. In severe service (frequent towing, off-road), change more often.

What is the towing capacity of the 2021 Grand Cherokee?

When properly equipped, the maximum towing capacity is 7,200 lb (3,266 kg). Always consult the Trailer Towing section in the manual for specific limits.

How do I pair my phone via Bluetooth?

Go to Uconnect Settings > Phone/Bluetooth and select 'Add Device'. Ensure your phone is discoverable. Follow the on-screen prompts and confirm the pairing code.

How do I enable the LaneSense system?

Press the LaneSense button on the steering wheel. The system will activate when driving above 37 mph (60 km/h). You can adjust sensitivity via Uconnect Settings.

What should I do if the tire pressure warning light comes on?

Check and inflate all tires to the recommended pressure (listed on the driver's door placard). If the light remains on, the system may need service. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is explained in the manual.

How do I use the ParkSense parking assist?

ParkSense activates automatically at low speeds. It uses sensors to detect obstacles and provides audible and visual warnings. For active park assist, press the ParkSense button on the center stack and follow the prompts.

Can I download the owner's manual in other languages?

Yes, visit mopar.com/om or owners.mopar.ca to download the manual in various languages. A translated PDF may also be available via the 'Get the translation' service on the notice page.

How do I open the liftgate without a key fob?

If the vehicle is unlocked, simply press the electronic liftgate release located above the license plate. If locked, use the key fob or the interior liftgate button.

USER MANUAL Grand Cherokee (2021) JEEP

This Owner's Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.

This Owner's Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner's Manual, NavigationUconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.

WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, halates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area I wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION....8
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 14
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....79
4 STARTING AND OPERATING 99
5 MULTIMEDIA 173
6 SAFETY 265
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 321
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 342
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 402
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 410
11 INDEX 415

INTRODUCTION

Symbols Key......9

ROLLOVER WARNING 9

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS...... 10

Symbol Glossary.... 10

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS 14

Key Fob 14

SENTRY KEY 16

IGNITION SWITCH 17

Keyless Enter-N-Go Ignition ....17

REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .... 18

How To Use Remote Start....19

To Exit Remote Start Mode....20

Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —

If Equipped....20

Remote Start Comfort Systems —

If Equipped....20

Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer

Activation - If Equipped ....21

Remote Start Cancel Message —

If Equipped....21

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..... 21

To Arm The System ....22

To Disarm The System 22

Rearming Of The System 23

Security System Manual Override....23

Tamper Alert 23

DOORS....23

Manual Door Locks 23

Power Door Locks 24

Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry .....24

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit....27

Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped .....27

Child-Protection Door Lock System —

Rear Doors....27

STEERING WHEEL 28

Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —

If Equipped 28

Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —

If Equipped 29

Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped......29

DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS —

IF EQUIPPED 30

Programming The Memory Feature ....30

Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob

To Memory....30

Memory Position Recall ....31

SEATS 31

Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) —

If Equipped....31

Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)....33

Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —

If Equipped....35

Heated Seats — If Equipped ....36

Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .....37

Head Restraints ....38

UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION 40

Introducing Voice Recognition ....40

Basic Voice Commands ....41

Get Started 41

Additional Information 42

MIRRORS 42

Inside Rearview Mirror....42

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ....43

Outside Mirrors 43

Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —

If Equipped 43

Power Mirrors 43

Power Folding Outside Mirrors —

If Equipped 44

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ....45

Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped .....45

UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER

(HOMELINK®) 45

Before You Begin Programming

HomeLink® 45

Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels......46

Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code

Or Non-Rolling Code Device ....46

Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door

Opener 46

Programming HomeLink® To A

Miscellaneous Device....47

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®

Button 47

Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .....48

EXTERIOR LIGHTS....49
Headlight Switch ....49
Multifunction Lever 49
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs)....49
High/Low Beam Switch....50
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped .....50
Flash-To-Pass....50
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped......50
Parking Lights And Panel Lights....50
Automatic Headlights With Wipers....50
Headlight Delay 51
Lights-On Reminder....51
Fog Lights — If Equipped....51
Turn Signals....51
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped....52
Automatic Headlight Leveling —
If Equipped....52
Battery Saver 52
INTERIOR LIGHTS 52
Interior Courtesy Lights....52
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .... 54
Windshield Wiper Operation ....54
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .....55
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ....56
CLIMATE CONTROLS 56
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions....56
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .....59
Climate Voice Commands....60
Operating Tips 60

INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ......62
Storage....62
USB/AUX Control — If Equipped ....63
Power Outlets 64
Power Inverter — If Equipped ....66
WINDOWS....67
Power Window Controls 67
Automatic Window Features ....67
Reset Auto-Up....68
Window Lockout Switch....68
Wind Buffeting 68
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ....69
Opening And Closing The Sunroof....69
Pinch Protect Feature 70
Venting Sunroof....70
Sunshade Operation 70
Sunroof Maintenance 70
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH
POWER SHADE — IF EQUIPPED ....70
Opening And Closing The Sunroof....71
Opening And Closing The Power Sunshade ...71
Pinch Protect Feature 72
Venting Sunroof....72
Sunroof Maintenance 72
HOOD 72
To Open The Hood....72
To Close The Hood ....73

LIFTGATE....73

To Unlock/Open The Liftgate 73

To Lock/Close The Liftgate....74

Power Liftgate — If Equipped ....74

Cargo Area Features 75

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ..... 77

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR

INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE .... 79

Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....80

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY 80

Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls....81

Oil Change Reset — If Equipped....82

Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items .....83

Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message — Electrical Load Reduction Actions (If Equipped) 86

TRIP COMPUTER....87

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES 88

Red Warning Lights....88

Yellow Warning Lights....91

Yellow Indicator Lights....94

Green Indicator Lights 95

White Indicator Lights....96

Blue Indicator Lights....97

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ..... 97

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity 97

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS 98

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE....99

Automatic Transmission 99

Normal Starting 99

AutoPark 100

If Engine Fails To Start 102

Cold Weather Operation (Below -22°F Or

-30°C) 102

After Starting.... 102

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED .....102

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .....103

PARKING BRAKE 103

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION....105

Ignition Park Interlock.... 106

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)

System 106

Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode 106

Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission..... 107

SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED....112

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION .... 112

Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/

Precautions - If Equipped.... 112

Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/

Precautions — If Equipped.... 113

Shift Positions.... 113

Shifting Procedures.... 114

Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped ..... 114

QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED.... 115

Description 115

Air Suspension Modes 117

Instrument Cluster Display Messages...... 117

Operation 117

SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED 119

Selec-Terrain Mode Selection 119

Instrument Cluster Display Messages...... 119

FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY —

IF EQUIPPED 120

POWER STEERING 120

STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED...... 120

Autostop Mode 120

Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not

Autostop.... 121

To Start The Engine While In Autostop

Mode 121

To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start

System 122

To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start

System 122

System Malfunction 122

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —

IF EQUIPPED....122

Cruise Control — If Equipped.... 122

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) —

If Equipped 125

PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST

SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....135

ParkSense Sensors.... 136

ParkSense Display 136

ParkSense Warning Display 140

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense...... 140

Service The ParkSense Park Assist

System 140

Cleaning The ParkSense System 141

ParkSense System Usage Precautions...... 141

PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED....142

Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense

Active Park Assist System.... 142

Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space

Assistance Operation.... 144

LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ....146

LaneSense Operation 146

Turning LaneSense On Or Off.... 147

LaneSense Warning Message.... 147

Changing LaneSense Status 149

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ....149

REFUELING THE VEHICLE ....151

Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release...... 151

VEHICLE LOADING ....152

Certification Label.... 152

TRAILER TOWING 153

Common Towing Definitions.... 153

Trailer Hitch Classification.... 156

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer

Weight Ratings) 157

Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —

If Equipped.... 158

Trailer And Tongue Weight 159

Towing Requirements 159

Towing Tips 162

RECREATIONAL TOWING

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another

Vehicle.... 163

Recreational Towing — Two Wheel Drive

Models 164

Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I

(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel

Drive Models.... 164

Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac II/

Quadra-Drive II Four-Wheel Drive

Models 164

DRIVING TIPS ....167

On-Road Driving Tips.... 167

Off-Road Driving Tips.... 168

MULTIMEDIA

UCONNECT SYSTEMS ....173

CYBERSECURITY 173

UCONNECT SETTINGS.... 174

Customer Programmable Features...... 175

UCONNECT INTRODUCTION 191

System Overview 191

Drag & Drop Menu Bar 193

Safety And General Information.... 193

UCONNECT MODES.... 194

Steering Wheel Audio Controls.... 194

Radio Mode 195

Media Mode 205

Phone Mode 207

ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® —

IF EQUIPPED 219

Android Auto™ 219

Apple CarPlay® 222

Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips

And Tricks 224

CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —

IF EQUIPPED 224

Is My Vehicle Connected? 224

Introduction To Connected Vehicle

Services 225

Getting Started With Connected Vehicle

Services 226

Using SiriusXM Guardian™ 229

Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™

Account 245

CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs ....245

Connected Services SOS FAQs 245

Connected Services Remote Door

Lock/Unlock FAQs 245

Connected Services Roadside

Assistance FAQs 246

Connected Services Send & Go FAQs ...... 246

Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs ... 246

Connected Services Stolen Vehicle

Assistance FAQs 246

Connected Services Remote Vehicle

Start FAQs 247

Connected Services Remote

Horn & Lights FAQs 247

Connected Services Account FAQs 248

Data Collection & Privacy 250

UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)

SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....250

Getting Started.... 250

Dual Video Screen.... 252

Headphones Operation.... 257

Controls.... 257

Replacing The Headphone Batteries..... 258

Accessibility — If Equipped 258

Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited

Warranty 258

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.....260

Regulatory And Safety Information .... 260

OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ....260

Off-Road Pages Status Bar 261

Vehicle Dynamics 262

Suspension 262

Pitch & Roll 263

Accessory Gauges 263

Selec-Terrain — If Equipped.... 264

SAFETY

SAFETY FEATURES ......265

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) 265

Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ..... 266

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ....275

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —

If Equipped.... 275

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With

Mitigation....279

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .... 281

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ....285

Occupant Restraint Systems Features ..... 285

Important Safety Precautions.... 285

Seat Belt Systems 286

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ..... 294

Child Restraints 304

SAFETY TIPS 317

Transporting Passengers.... 317

Transporting Pets 317

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside

The Vehicle 317

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make

Outside The Vehicle 319

Exhaust Gas.... 319

Carbon Monoxide Warnings 320

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 321

ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ..... 321

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 325

Preparations For Jacking 325

Jack Location.... 326

Spare Tire Stowage — If Equipped 327

Jacking Instructions 327

JUMP STARTING 332

Preparations For Jump Start 332

Jump Starting Procedure 333

REFUELING IN EMERGENCY 334

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 335

MANUAL PARK RELEASE.... 336

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 338

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 338

Two-Wheel Drive Models 340

Four-Wheel Drive Models 340

Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ...... 341

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE

SYSTEM (EARS) 341

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....341

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING ....342

Maintenance Plan.... 343

ENGINE COMPARTMENT 346

3.6L Engine 346

5.7L Engine 347

Checking Oil Level.... 348

Adding Washer Fluid 348

Maintenance-Free Battery 348

Pressure Washing 349

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE 349

Engine Oil 349

Engine Oil Filter 350

Engine Air Cleaner Filter 351

Air Conditioner Maintenance 352

Accessory Drive Belt Inspection.... 354

Body Lubrication 355

Windshield Wiper Blades 355

Exhaust System 358

Cooling System.... 359

Brake System 363

Automatic Transmission 363

Front/Rear Axle Fluid 364

Transfer Case 365

Fuses.... 365

Bulb Replacement 372

TIRES 377

Tire Safety Information 377

Tires - General Information 386

Tire Types.... 390

Spare Tires — If Equipped.... 391

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care 393

Snow Traction Devices.... 395

Tire Rotation Recommendations 397

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES 397

Treadwear....397

Traction Grades.... 398

Temperature Grades.... 398

STORING THE VEHICLE 398

BODYWORK....398

Protection From Atmospheric Agents ..... 398

Body And Underbody Maintenance.... 399

Preserving The Bodywork 399

INTERIORS ....400

Seats And Fabric Parts.... 400

Plastic And Coated Parts 400

Leather Surfaces 401

Glass Surfaces 401

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ..... 402

BRAKE SYSTEM....402

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE

SPECIFICATIONS 402

Torque Specifications 402

FUEL REQUIREMENTS 403

3.6L Engine 404

5.7L Engine 404

Reformulated Gasoline 404

Materials Added To Fuel 404

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends.... 405

Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel

Vehicles....405

CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ..... 405

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese

Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline.... 406

Fuel System Cautions 406

FLUID CAPACITIES 407

ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS 408

CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .... 409

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE 410

Prepare For The Appointment 410

Prepare A List 410

Be Reasonable With Requests.... 410

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ....410

FCA US LLC Customer Center.... 410

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center 410

Mexico.... 411

Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands 411

Customer Assistance For The Hearing

Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)...... 411

Service Contract 411

WARRANTY INFORMATION......412

MOPAR® PARTS 412

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS......412

In The 50 United States And

Washington, D.C. 412

In Canada 413

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 413

General Information....414

INTRODUCTION

Dear Customer,

Congratulations on the purchase of your Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.

This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles, both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle is designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you operate this vehicle, read the Owner's Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case operation. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or operating the vehicle, don't overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision ⇒ page 167.

This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording "If Equipped". All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.

When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.

SYMBOLS KEY

WARNING!	These statements are against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!	These statements are against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:	A suggestion which will improve installation, operation, and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage.
TIP:	General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW	Follow this reference for additional information on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE	Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to the topic.

If you do not read this entire Owner's Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.

ROLLOVER WARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control, it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.

Rollover Warning Label

Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by

10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

SYMBOL GLOSSARY

Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol ↩ page 88.

Red Warning Lights
	Air Bag Warning Light ➕ page 88
BRAKE	Brake Warning Light ➕ page 88

Red Warning Lights
	Battery Charge Warning Light ↘ page 89
	Door Open Warning Light ↘ page 89
	Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light ↘ page 89
	Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light ↘ page 89
	Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ↘ page 90
	Hood Open Warning Light ↘ page 90
	Liftgate Open Warning Light ↘ page 90
	Oil Pressure Warning Light ↘ page 90
	Oil Temperature Warning Light ➕ page 90
	Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light ➕ page 90
	Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If Equipped ➕ page 90
	Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped ➕ page 91

Yellow Warning Lights
	Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light ➕ page 91
	Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light ➕ page 91
	Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light — If Equipped ➕ page 91

Yellow Warning Lights
	Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light —If Equipped page 92
	Service LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped page 92
	LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped page 92
	Low Fuel Warning Light page 92
	Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped page 92
	Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL) page 92
	Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped page 93
	Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light —If Equipped page 93
	Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If Equipped ➕ page 93
	Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light ➕ page 93

Yellow Indicator Lights
	Air Suspension Active Indicator Light — If Equipped⇨ page 94
ENTRY/EXIT	Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light — If Equipped⇨ page 94
AERO	Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator Light —If Equipped⇨ page 94
OFF RD 1	Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light — If Equipped⇨ page 94
OFF RD 2	Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light — If Equipped⇨ page 95

Yellow Indicator Lights
	Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off Indicator Light —If Equipped ↘ page 95
	4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped ↘ page 95
	NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped ↘ page 95

Green Indicator Lights
	Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target DetectedIndicator Light — If Equipped⇨ page 95
	Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light —If Equipped⇨ page 95
	Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped⇨ page 95
	Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped⇨ page 95
	LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped ↩ page 95
	Park/Headlight On Indicator Light ↩ page 95
	Snow Mode Indicator Light ↩ page 95
	Sport Mode Indicator Light ↩ page 95
	Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped ↩ page 95
	Tow Mode Indicator Light ↩ page 96
	Track Mode Indicator Light ↩ page 96
	Turn Signal Indicator Lights ↩ page 96

White Indicator Lights
	Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped ↘ page 96
	Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light ↘ page 96
	Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If Equipped ↘ page 96
	LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped ↘ page 96
	Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light — If Equipped ↘ page 96

Blue Indicator Lights
	High Beam Indicator Light page 97

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS

KEY FOB

Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless Enter-N-Go (if equipped), Remote Start (if equipped), and remote power liftgate operation. The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. The key fob also contains an emergency key, which is stored in the rear of the key fob.

NOTE:

• The key fob's wireless signal may be blocked if the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device. This may result in poor performance.
• With ignition in the ON position and the vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are disabled.

A0204000070US

Key Fob

1 – Unlock Button
2 - Liftgate Button
3 – Emergency Key
4 - Lock Button
5 - Remote Start Button
6-PANIC Button

In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to the instrument cluster, which will display directions to follow page 414.

To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate

Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to unlock the driver's door, or twice within five seconds to unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To lock all the doors and the liftgate, push the lock button once.

When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash and the illuminated entry system will be activated. When the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp.

NOTE:

• If the vehicle is unlocked with the key fob, and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and the security system will arm (if equipped).
• If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock again automatically if the key is left inside the passenger compartment, otherwise the doors will stay locked.

All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of the unlock button through Uconnect Settings → page 174.

Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob

The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.

NOTE:

• Customers are recommended to use a battery obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin battery dimensions.

• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for further information.

• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.

• Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the emergency key release (1) on the back of the key fob and pulling the emergency key out with your other hand.

1 – Emergency Key Release
2 – Emergency Key

1. Separate the key fob halves using a #2 flat blade screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry the two halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.

1. Remove the back cover to access and replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the (+) sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching

the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

1. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves together.

WARNING!

• The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just two hours and can lead to death.
• If you think a battery may have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate medical attention.
• Keep new and used batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away from children.

Programming And Requesting Additional Key Fobs

Programming the key fob may be performed by an authorized dealer.

NOTE:

• Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be re-purposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
• Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• Always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position.

Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics.

NOTE:

• When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
• Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match the vehicle locks.

SENTRY KEY

The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is used to start the engine.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics.

In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.

All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

NOTE:

A key fob that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key ➕ page 414.

IGNITION SWITCH

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO IGNITION

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.

The START/STOP ignition button has several operating modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in position. These modes are OFF, ACC, ON/RUN, and START.

A0205000012U5

START/STOP Ignition Button

1-OFF
2-ACC
3 - ON/RUN

The push button ignition can be placed in the following modes:

OFF

• The engine is stopped
- Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking, alarm, etc.) are still available

ACC

• Engine is not started
• Some electrical devices are available (e.g. power windows)

ON/RUN

• Driving position
• All the electrical devices are available (e.g. climate controls, etc.)

START

- The engine will start (when foot is on the brake pedal)

NOTE:

If the ignition switch does not change the mode by pushing the button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob against the START/STOP ignition button and push to operate the ignition switch.

Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure

WARNING!

- When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

NOTE:

• When opening the driver's door with the ignition in ON/RUN (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the chime, the message will display "Ignition Or Accessory On" in the cluster.
• For more information on proper engine starting procedures, see ➤ page 99.

REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the key fob to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of

328 ft (100 m).

Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.

NOTE:

Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce this range ➔ page 414.

WARNING!

• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.

How To Use Remote Start

Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the engine off.

To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and with a valid Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob in the vehicle, press the brake pedal and place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE:

• With Remote Start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes.
• Remote Start can only be used twice.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for a third cycle.

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:

• Gear selector in PARK
- Doors closed
- Hood closed
- Liftgate closed
- Hazard switch off
- Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
● Battery at an acceptable charge level
- PANIC button not pushed
- System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
● Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
- Ignition in OFF position
- Fuel level meets minimum requirement
- Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
- Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated

WARNING!

• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.

To Exit Remote Start Mode

To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start system, either push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the door handles, and disarm the vehicle security system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the START/STOP ignition button.

The Remote Start system will turn the engine off with another push and release of the Remote Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.

Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the climate controls will resume the previously set operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).

NOTE:

• To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instrument cluster display until you push the START/STOP ignition button.

REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED

When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient temperature is 40° F ( 4.5° C) or below, the system will automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the system will automatically adjust the settings depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped" in the next section for detailed operation.

REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED

When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat feature will turn on if selected in the comfort menu screen within Uconnect Settings ➤ page 174. In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the Remote Start is activated and is selected in the comfort menu screen. The vehicle will adjust the climate control settings depending on the outside ambient temperature.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped

The climate controls will be automatically adjusted to the optimal temperature and mode settings depending on the outside ambient temperature. This will occur until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the climate controls will resume their previous settings.

Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped

• In ambient temperatures at 40° F ( 4.5° C) or below, the climate settings will default to maximum heat, with fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the vehicle will enter Mix mode.
• In ambient temperatures from 40° F ( 4.5° C) to 78° F ( 26° C), the climate settings will be based on the last settings selected by the driver.
• In ambient temperatures at 78° F ( 26° C) or above, the climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation on.

For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control settings, see ➤ page 56.

NOTE:

These features will stay on through the duration of Remote Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will change if manually adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in Remote Start mode, and exit automatic override. This includes the OFF button on the climate controls, which will turn the system off.

REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED

When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient temperature is less than 33° F ( 0.6° C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will resume previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and operation will continue.

REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE — IF EQUIPPED

The following messages will display in the instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to Remote Start or exits Remote Start prematurely:

• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset

The instrument cluster display message stays active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter-N-Go Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security system is armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle security system will provide the following audible and visible signals:

• The horn will pulse
  • The turn signals will flash
• The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash

To Arm The System

Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:

1. Make sure the vehicle's ignition is placed in the OFF position.

- For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make sure the vehicle's keyless ignition system is OFF.

1. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:

- Push the lock button on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.

- Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry door handle with a valid key fob available in the same exterior zone page 24.

- Push the lock button on the key fob.

1. If any doors are open, close them.

To Disarm The System

The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of the following methods:

• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the door ➕ page 24.
• Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to disarm the system.

NOTE:

• The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security system. Use of the door key cylinder when the system is armed will sound the alarm when the door is opened.

• The Vehicle Security system remains armed when the power liftgate is opened using the liftgate button on the key fob. If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door from the inside, the alarm will sound.

• If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock the liftgate, the Vehicle Security system is disarmed and the rest of the vehicle doors will remain locked unless all doors are set to unlock on first press within Uconnect Settings.

• When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.

The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm, regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.

If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.

REARMING OF THE SYSTEM

If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, five seconds between cycles, and up to eight cycles if the trigger remains active. The Vehicle Security system will then rearm itself.

SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE

The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock.

TAMPER ALERT

If something has triggered the Vehicle Security system in your absence, the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security system.

DOORS

MANUAL DOOR LOCKS

The power door locks can be manually locked from inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

NOTE:

Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the Vehicle Security system.

WARNING!

- For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

Power Door Locks

The power door lock switches are located on each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors.

Power Door Lock Switch

The driver's door will unlock automatically if the keys are found inside the vehicle when the door lock button on the front door panel is used to lock the door. This will occur for two attempts. Upon the third attempt, the doors will lock even if the key is inside.

NOTE:

If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless signal may get blocked, and the driver's door may not unlock automatically.

If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's door is open, the doors will not lock.

If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY

The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle's key fob and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.

NOTE:

• Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through Uconnect Settings ▶ page 174.

• The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob's wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry system from locking/unlocking the vehicle.

• Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach (low beams, license plate lamp, position lamps) for whichever time duration is set between 0, 30 (default), 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn signal lamps.

• If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and (if equipped) will arm the Vehicle Security system.

To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver's door handle will unlock the driver door automatically. Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock all doors and the liftgate automatically.

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

NOTE:

• Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver's door handle, depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect system
  page 174.

- All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver's door unlock preference setting.

Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

There are five situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry vehicle:

• A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while the door is open.
• When the Vehicle Security system is in pre-arm or armed status and the liftgate transitions from opened to closed.
• When the liftgate transitions from open to closed and Remote Start is active.

When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob inside the car, the car will unlock and alert the customer.

NOTE:

The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true:

• The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then the doors are closed.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door handle.

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To Lock The Vehicle's Doors And Liftgate

With one of the vehicle's Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handles, pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock the vehicle.

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

NOTE:

DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).

DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

NOTE:

• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle unlocking.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect Settings, the key protection described in "Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob battery is depleted.

To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate

The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release to open.

NOTE:

• If the vehicle is unlocked, the liftgate will open with the handle and no key fob is required.
• The liftgate will either unlock along with the vehicle doors, or it will need to be unlocked by pushing the electronic liftgate release, depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect system ➔ page 174.
• The liftgate (and vehicle doors if unlocked) must be locked using the lock button on the key fob, the Passive Entry lock button, or the lock buttons on the interior front door panels.

Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry Location

1 – Electronic Liftgate Release
2 - Lock Button Location

To Lock The Liftgate

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located on the outside liftgate door handle.

NOTE:

The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all doors and the liftgate ➤ page 414.

AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT

The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks after the following sequence of actions:

1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled within Uconnect Settings → page 174.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission gear selector was not in PARK, then is placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature is enabled/disabled within Uconnect Settings → page 174.

CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK SYSTEM — REAR DOORS

To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock system.

To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position. When the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the unlocked position.
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the locked position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, pull up on the door lock knob (unlocked position), roll down the window, and open the door with the outside door handle.

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).

NOTE:

Always use this device when carrying children. After engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for effective engagement by trying to open a door with the internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be sure to check that there is no one left inside.

STEERING WHEEL

MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.

Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Control

To unlock the steering column, push the control downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the control upward until fully engaged.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.

POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering column control is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column.

Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Control

Use the four-way control to adjust the steering column.

NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings, you can use your key fob or the memory switch on the driver's door trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to saved positions ➔ page 30.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED

The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.

The heated steering wheel control button is located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

• Push the heated steering wheel button once to turn the heating element on.
• Push the heated steering wheel button—a second time to turn the heating element off.

NOTE:

The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.

For information on use with the Remote Start system, see ➤ page 20.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows the driver to save up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile saves desired position settings for the following features:

• Driver seat
• Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (on/off) (if equipped)
• Side mirrors
  ● Power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped)
• A set of desired radio station presets

NOTE:

• Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
• Be sure to program the radio presets prior to programming the memory settings.

The memory setting switch is located on the driver's door trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:

• The set (S) button, which is used to activate the memory save function.
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either of two saved memory profiles.

Memory Switch

PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE

To create a new memory profile, perform the following:

NOTE:

Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected profile from memory.

1. Place the vehicle's ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic steering column [if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch, and then push the desired memory button (1 or 2) within five seconds. The instrument cluster display will display which memory position has been set.

NOTE:

Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile.

LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB TO MEMORY

Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two saved memory profiles by pushing the unlock button on the key fob.

NOTE:

Before programming your key fobs you must select the "Personal Settings Linked To Key

Fob" feature through the Uconnect system

page 174.

To program your key fobs, perform the following:

1. Place the vehicle's ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. "Memory Profile Set" (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within 10 seconds.

NOTE:

Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed by pushing the unlock button on the key fob within 10 seconds.

MEMORY POSITION RECALL

NOTE:

If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, a message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display.

To recall the memory settings for driver one or two, push the desired memory button number (1 or 2) or the unlock button on the key fob linked to the desired memory position.

A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is canceled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of the vehicle.

WARNING!

- It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.

Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment

Some models may be equipped with a manual front passenger seat. The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.

Adjustment Bar

While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment — Recline

To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.

Recline Lever

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If Equipped

To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into place.

Fold-Flat Passenger Seat

WARNING!

- Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted, and you could be severely injured or killed. Only adjust a seat while the vehicle is parked.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

- Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and be severely injured or killed. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)

WARNING!

Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.

Reclining Rear Seat

To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.

Rear Seat Recline

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

To Lower Rear Seat

Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room.

NOTE:

Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat-back to fold down easily.

1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.

Rear Seat Release

NOTE:

• Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the left outboard or rear center seat belt buckled.

• Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the right outboard seat belt buckled.

• Fold the rear seat completely forward.

Rear Seat Folded

NOTE:

You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply unfolding the seats to the open position, over time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.

To Raise Rear Seat

Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position.

WARNING!

• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system.

POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED

Some models may be equipped with eight-way power driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two switches that control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback.

Power Seat Switches

1 - Seatback Switch
2 - Seat Switch

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward by using the power seat switch. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down by using the power seat switch. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down using the power seat switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

Reclining The Seatback

The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward by using the power seat switch. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.

Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and lower the position of the support.

Power Lumbar Switch

Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.

The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you place the vehicle's ignition in the OFF position.

• When you place the vehicle's ignition in the OFF position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the vehicle's ignition in the ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not available when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.

When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory setting profile ➤ page 30.

NOTE:

The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled through the programmable features in the Uconnect system ➤ page 174.

HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seat-back that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

Front Heated Seats — If Equipped

The front heated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen and the controls screen.

You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. The indicator arrows in the touchscreen buttons indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for HI, and one for LO. Turning the heating elements off will return the user to the radio screen.

• Press the heated seat button/once to turn the HI setting on.
• Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the LO setting on.
• Press the heated seat button/a third time to turn the heating elements off.

NOTE:

• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
• The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator changes it.

For information on use with the Remote Start system, see ↩ page 20.

Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped

On some models, the two rear outboard seats may be equipped with heated seats. There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently. The heated seat switches for each heater are located on the rear of the center console.

You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. Indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for OFF.

• Push the switch/once to turn the HI setting on.
• Push the switch—a second time to turn the LO setting on.
• Push the switch a third time to turn the heating elements off.

NOTE:

The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator changes it.

FRONT VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED

The ventilated seats are equipped with fans that can be controlled through the climate and control screen in the Uconnect system. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.

• Press the ventilated seat button* once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button ⁴ a second time to choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button* a third time to turn the ventilated seat off.

NOTE:

The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.

For information on use with the Remote Start system, see ➤ page 20.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.

Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front Seats

Active Head Restraints (AHR) are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The AHRs will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap between the back of the occupant's head and the AHR. This system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the driver or front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. For more information, see page 285.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.

Adjustment Button

For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.

Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)

Active Head Restraint (Tilted)

NOTE:

• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see an authorized dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, see ➤ page 285.

WARNING!

• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed.

Adjustment — Rear Seats

The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat is folded to a load floor position, but do not return to their normal position when the rear seat is raised. After returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head restraint until it locks in place. The outboard head restraints are not removable.

Returning Rear Head Restraint

The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.

Head Restraint Removal — Rear Seats

The center head restraint can be adjusted when occupied, or removed for Child Seat Tethering. To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go by pulling upward. Then, push the release button at the base of the post while pulling the head restraint upward. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

WARNING!

• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied.

Center Head Restraint Release Button

NOTE:

For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, see page 285.

WARNING!

• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.

Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your vehicle's Voice Recognition (VR) system.

Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display

Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display

BASIC VOICE COMMANDS

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system.

Push the VR button Ⓧ After the beep, say:

• "Cancel" to stop a current voice session
• "Help" to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• "Repeat" to listen to the system prompts again

Notice the visual cues that inform you of your VR system's status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.

GET STARTED

The Voice Recognition (VR) button is used to activate/deactivate your Voice Recognition system.

Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:

• Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead.
• Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push the Voice Recognition (VR) button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.

- You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice Command from the current category.

Uconnect Voice Command Buttons

1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio, Media, And Climate Functions

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.

page 414.

Uconnect System Support:

• US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French)

SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:

• US residents visit https://www.driveuconnect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html or call:1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents visit https://www.driveuconnect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call:1-877-324-9091

MIRRORS

INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR

Manual Mirror— If Equipped

The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield).

Manual Mirror Adjustment

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you.

NOTE:

The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver's rear view.

You can turn the Automatic Dimming Mirror feature on or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light in the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated.

Automatic Dimming Mirror Button

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS

To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the visors and lift the cover.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

Sun Visor "Slide-On-Rod" Feature — If Equipped

The sun visor "Slide-On-Rod" feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.

1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun blockage.

NOTE:

The sun visor can also be extended while the sun visor is against the windshield for additional sun blockage through the front of the vehicle.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.

Outside Mirrors Folding Feature

All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have three detent positions:

• Full forward position

• Full rearward position

- Normal position

OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED

The outside mirrors will automatically dim for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.

POWER MIRRORS

The power mirror switch is located on the driver's side door trim panel.

The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, push the mirror select button for the mirror that you want to adjust.

Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.

Power Mirror Switch

1 – Left Mirror Selection
2 - Mirror Direction Control
3 – Right Mirror Selection

Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Settings Feature ↩ page 30.

POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED

The power folding mirrors can be folded rearward and unfolded into the normal driving position.

The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the normal driving position.

If the mirror is manually folded after a powered cycle, a potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors back to the normal driving position. If the mirror does not fold automatically, check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area, which can cause excessive drag.

Power Folding Mirror Switch

Automatic Power Folding Mirrors

When the Automatic Fold Mirrors feature is enabled, the exterior mirrors will fold in when exiting the vehicle (the ignition is OFF, all doors are closed, and the doors are locked).

• If the exterior mirrors were auto-folded, they will unfold when the ignition is placed in the ON position.
• If the exterior mirrors were manually folded (by hand or by pushing the power folding mirror switch), they will not automatically unfold.

NOTE:

The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect system → page 174.

Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors

You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the following occurs:

• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.

• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded (by hand or by pushing the power folding mirror switch).

• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.

• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.

To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them by pushing the button (this may require multiple attempts). This resets them to their normal driving position.

HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature will be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped) ↩ page 56.

TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE — IF EQUIPPED

This feature provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will assist with the driver's ground visibility. The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. If the vehicle is equipped with

memory settings, this feature will be linked to the programmable settings.

NOTE:

The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect system ➤ page 174.

UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOMELINK®)

HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light

- HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.

• The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the overhead console or sunvisor designate the three different HomeLink® channels.
• To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will activate the devices they are programmed to with each press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
• The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the center button ➤ page 414.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

For efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed to activate the device you are trying to program your HomeLink® button to.

Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.

It is recommended that you erase all the channels of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.

ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK® CHANNELS

To erase the channels, follow this procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.

IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A ROLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE DEVICE

Before programming a device to one of your HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.

Rolling Code Devices

To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button located where the antenna is attached to the device. The button may not be immediately visible when looking at the device. The name and color of the button may vary slightly by manufacturer.

NOTE:

The "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button is not the button you normally use to operate the device.

Non-rolling Code Devices

Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a rolling code. These devices will also not have a "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A GARAGE DOOR OPENER

To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate your garage door opener motor, follow the steps below:

NOTE:

All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when programming additional buttons.

1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program, while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to program while you push and hold the garage door opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this happens, release both buttons.

NOTE:

Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code final steps.

Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps

NOTE:

You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.

1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly push and release the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink® button three times (holding the button for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm that the garage door opener motor operates. If the garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat the final steps for the rolling code procedure.

Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps

1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete.

2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm that the garage door opener motor operates. If the garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat the steps from the beginning.

WARNING!

• Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate.
• Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or confined area while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and can cause you and others to be severely injured or killed.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE

Follow the procedure on programming HomeLink® to a garage door opener

page 46. Be sure to determine if the device

has a rolling code, or non-rolling code before beginning the programming process.

NOTE:

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner. The procedure may need to be performed multiple times to successfully pair the device to your HomeLink® buttons.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK® BUTTON

To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been previously trained, without erasing all the channels, follow the procedure below. Be sure to determine whether the new device you want to program the HomeLink® button to have a rolling code or non-rolling code.

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without starting the engine.

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the HomeLink® Indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2 in "Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door Opener" and follow all remaining steps.

CANADIAN /GATE OPERATOR PROGRAMMING

For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that require the transmitter signals to "time-out" after several seconds of transmission.

Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some US gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button, while you press and release ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.

NOTE:

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining Home-Link® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Canadian/Gate Operator)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with "Canadian/Gate Operator Programming" step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights, and fog lights (if equipped).

Headlight Switch

1 - Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Push Front Fog Light
3 - Instrument Panel Dimmer Control

To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.

NOTE:

• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

CAUTION!

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.

MULTIFUNCTION LEVER

The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.

Multifunction Lever

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLs)

The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) (low intensity) come on whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until the ignition is placed in the OFF or ACC position, or the parking brake is engaged.

NOTE:

- On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may deactivate or reduce intensity on one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is

activated on that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights are activated).

- The DRLs function may be disabled through the Uconnect system ➤ page 174.

NOTE:

For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running Lights will automatically deactivate when the front fog lights are turned on.

Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the multifunction lever back will turn the low beams on.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM — IF EQUIPPED

The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automatically controlling the high beams through the use of a camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.

NOTE:

• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off by selecting "ON" under "Auto Dim High Beams" within your Uconnect Settings ↩ page 174, as well as turning the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.
• If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See a local authorized dealer.

FLASH-To-PASS

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the lever is released.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED

This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch to the A (auto) position.

When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.

NOTE:

The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.

PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS

To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH WIPERS

If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it also has this customer-programmable feature. When your headlights are in the automatic mode and the

engine is running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on. This feature is programmable through the Uconnect system page 174.

If your vehicle is equipped with Rain Sensing Wipers ➤ page 55, and it is activated, the headlights will automatically turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles within approximately one minute. They will turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop.

NOTE:

When your headlights come on during the daytime, the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower nighttime intensity.

HEADLIGHT DELAY

To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight delay feature will leave the headlights on for up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is placed in the OFF position while the headlight switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON position.

NOTE:

• This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system ↩ page 174.
• The headlight delay feature is automatically activated if the headlight switch is left in the A (auto) position when the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

LIGHTS-ON REMINDER

If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the vehicle will chime when the driver's door is opened.

Fog Lights — IF EQUIPPED

The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight switch to the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control.

Fog Light Operation

The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the high beam is selected.

TURN SIGNALS

Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation.

NOTE:

If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.

LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED

Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash three times then automatically turn off.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT LEVELING — IF EQUIPPED

This feature prevents the headlights from interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.

BATTERY SAVER

Timers are set to both the interior and exterior lights to protect the life of your vehicle's battery.

After 10 minutes, if the ignition is in the OFF position and any door is left open or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome light on position, the interior lights will automatically turn off.

NOTE:

Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is ON.

If the headlights remain on while the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened or when the dimmer control is rotated to its farthest upward position. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry and the unlock button is pushed on the key fob, the courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way down, to the last (off) detent, will cause all the interior lights to turn off. This is also known as the "Party" mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle's battery.

INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS

The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a second time.

Courtesy Lights

Front Map/Reading Lights

The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead console.

Front Map/Reading Lights

Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on either side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night time visibility. To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The lights will also turn on when the unlock button on the key fob is pushed.

Front Map/Reading Light Switches

Ambient Light — If Equipped

The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light feature. This light illuminates for improved visibility of the floor and center console area.

Ambient Light

Dimmer Controls

The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the instrument cluster display, radio and overhead console by rotating the control to the first detent up until you hear a click. This feature is called "Parade" mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day. Rotating the dimmer control up to the second detent, the furthest position up, turns on the courtesy lights. This feature is known as "Dome On".

Dimmer Control

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever.

A0216000068US

Multifunction Lever

Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper operation.

Windshield Wiper Operation

CAUTION!

Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the "park" position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off, and the blades cannot return to the "park" position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

Intermittent Wipers

Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when weather conditions permit. At driving speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second (fourth detent). If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.

Windshield Washers

To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward the steering wheel) and hold. If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several cycles after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

A0218000024US

Windshield Washer Operation

If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate for several cycles, then turn off.

NOTE:

As a protective measure, the washer will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is released the washer will resume normal operation.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use.

Mist

Rotate the end of the lever downward to the MIST position and release for a single wiping cycle.

NOTE:

The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.

For information on wiper care and replacement, see ➤ page 355.

RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED

This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four detent positions to activate this feature.

The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least sensitive, and wiper delay detent position four is the most sensitive.

Wiper delay position three should be used for normal rain conditions.

NOTE:

• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.

• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.

• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect system page 174.

The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the following conditions:

- Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first placed in the ON position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).

- Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.

- Remote Start Mode Inhibit – On vehicles equipped with Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode.

REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER

The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever.

Rear Wiper/Washer Control

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent for intermittent operation and to the second detent for continuous operation.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the third detent to activate the washer. The washer will continue to operate as long as the switch is held.

Rotate the center portion downward from the OFF position to activate the rear washer. The washer will continue to operate as long as the switch is held.

NOTE:

As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is released the pump will resume normal operation.

If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the wiper will automatically return to the "park" position.

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the radio.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

MAX A/C Button

Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C indicator

illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C to exit.

NOTE:

The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.

MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.

A/C Button

Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the current setting. The A/C indicator illuminates

when A/C is ON.

The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool

dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin.

NOTE:

• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radiator and through the condenser.

Recirculation Button

Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed.

Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield.

AUTO Button

Set your desired temperature and press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the current setting. The AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is on. Auto will achieve and maintain your desired temperature by adjusting distribution and blower speed. Toggling this function will

cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes ➕ page 59. Auto mode is highly recommended for efficiency.

Front Defrost Button

Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the Climate Control system will return to the previous setting.

Rear Defrost Button

Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

Driver And Passenger Up And Down Buttons

These buttons provide the driver and passenger with independent temperature control.

Push the Up button on the faceplate or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer

temperature settings.

Push the Down button on the faceplate or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for temperature settings.

SYNC Button

Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when SYNC is on. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.

NOTE:

The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.

Blower Control

Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the Climate Control system. There are seven blower speeds available.

Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode

to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.

Faceplate

The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.

Touchscreen

Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.

Mode Control

Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.

Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of

the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.

Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window

demister outlets.

NOTE:

Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Climate Control OFF Button

Press and release this button on the touchscreen or push the OFF button on the faceplate to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.

AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC)

Automatic Operation

1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is

displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.

1. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in US or Metric units within Uconnect Settings page 174.

To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.

Manual Operation Override

This system offers a full complement of manual override features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode.

CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS

Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.

Push the VR button. After the beep, say one of the following commands:

• "Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees"
• "Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees"

Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.

OPERATING TIPS

NOTE:

Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions.

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.

Winter Operation

To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause window fogging.

Vacation/Storage

For information on maintaining the Climate Control system when the vehicle is being stored for an extended period of time, see page 398.

Window Fogging

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.

Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.

Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.

Cabin Air Filter

The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.

Stop/Start System — If Equipped

While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition.

Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped

The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element located at the base of the windshield.

It operates automatically once the following conditions are met:

● Activation By Front Defrost

The wiper de-icer activates automatically during a cold weather manual start with full defrost, and when the ambient temperature is below 33° F ( 0.6° C).

• Activation By Rear Defrost

The wiper de-icer activates automatically when the Rear Defrost is operating and the ambient temperature is below 33° F ( 0.6° C).

- Activation By Remote Start Operation

When the Remote Start is activated and the outside ambient temperature is less than 33° F ( 0.6° C) the windshield wiper de-icer is activated. Exiting Remote Start will resume previous operation, except if the Windshield Wiper De-Icer is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and operation will continue.

Operating Tips Chart

NOTE:

The below chart is for Manual Override Operation, otherwise run in AUTO.

WEATHER	CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And Vehicle Interior Is Very Hot	Set the mode control to Panel Mode), MAX A/C (MAX A/C) on, and blower on high. Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out the hot air. Adjust the controls as needed to achieve comfort.
Warm Weather	Turn (A/C) on and set the mode control to Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny	Operate in Bi-Level Mode .
Cool & Humid Conditions	Set the mode control to Floor Mode and turn (A/C) on to keep windows clear.
Cold Weather	Set the mode control to Floor Mode . If windshield fogging starts to occur, move the control to Mix Mode .

INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT

STORAGE

Glove Compartment

The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel.

Glove Compartment

To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment in the open position. Driving with the glove compartment open may result in injury in a collision.

Door Storage

Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy access.

Console Features

The center console contains both an upper and a lower storage area.

Storage Compartment

To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on the small latch located on the lid.

Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the lower storage compartment.

Lower Storage Compartment

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.

Overhead Sunglasses Storage

At the front of the console, a compartment is provided for storing a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a "push/push" design. Push the pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the door to close.

Sunglasses Bin Door

USB/AUX CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

Connecting The External USB/AUX Device

Use the connection cable to connect an external USB device to the vehicle's USB/AUX connector port which is located in the center console.

The USB ports on the media hub are equipped with a Smart Electronic Voltage Regulator (Smart Charge) feature. This feature allows a device to charge for up to one hour after the vehicle is powered off.

Integrated Center Console USB/AUX Media HUB

1 - USB Port One
2 - AUX Port
3 - USB Port Two

Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle's USB control system (an external USB device may take a few minutes to connect), the audio device starts charging and is ready for use.

NOTE:

If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the USB control system until a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the audio device connected to the USB control system can charge it to the required level.

Using This Feature

By using an external USB device to connect to the USB port:

• The audio device can be played on the vehicle's sound system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) information on the radio display.
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List the contents.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB connector (if supported by the specific audio device).

NOTE:

For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.

Second Row USB Charging Port

Second row USB connector ports can be used for charging purposes only. Use the connection cable to connect an external USB device to the charging ports which are located on the rear of the center console.

Rear Center Console USB Ports

POWER OUTLETS

Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp) power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlets are labeled with either a "key" or a "battery" symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a "key" are powered when the ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a "battery" are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times.

NOTE:

All accessories connected to the "battery" powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge.

CAUTION!

Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain access to this power outlet.

Front Power Outlet

In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power outlet located in the storage area of the center console.

Center Console Outlet

The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo area.

Rear Cargo Power Outlet

NOTE:

The rear power outlet can be switched from "ignition" only to constant "battery" powered all the time. See your local authorized dealer for details.

Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse

Power Outlet Fuse Locations

1 — F104 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90-F91 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!

- Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's battery.

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED

There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the back of the center console to convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.

NOTE:

Certain video game consoles, new computers and power tools will exceed this power limit.

Power Inverter

The power inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet, the inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

WINDOWS

The window controls on the driver's door control all the door windows.

Power Window Switches

The passenger door windows can also be operated by using the single window controls on the passenger door trim panel. The window controls will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.

To open the window part way (manually), push the window switch down briefly and release.

If equipped, the key fob may also be used to raise or lower vehicle windows while the ignition is in the OFF position.

NOTE:

The power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is programmable within Uconnect Settings → page 174.

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES

Auto-Down Feature

The driver and front passenger door power window switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch down for a short period of time, then release, and the window will go down automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the switch briefly.

Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection

Lift the window switch up for a short period of time and release; the window will go up automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.

To close the window part way, lift the window switch briefly and release it when you want the window to stop.

If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window.

NOTE:

Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close the window manually.

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the window path before closing.

RESET AUTO-UP

Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:

1. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.

WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH

The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push and release the window lockout button. To enable the window controls, push and release the window lockout button again.

Window Lockout Switch

WIND BUFFETING

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions.

This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console.

Power Sunroof Switch

WARNING!

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.

OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF

Express Open/Close

Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically.

Push the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically.

During Express Open or Express Close operation, any other movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

Manual Open/Close

To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward to full open.

To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the forward position.

Any release of the switch during open or close operation will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will remain in a partially opened position until the switch is operated and held again.

PINCH PROTECT FEATURE

This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.

NOTE:

If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.

VENTING SUNROOF

Push and release the Vent button within one-half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called "Express Vent" and it will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

SUNSHADE OPERATION

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

NOTE:

The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.

SUNROOF MAINTENANCE

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear out any debris that may have collected in the tracks.

COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF EQUIPPED

The CommandView sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console.

The power shade switch is located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console.

CommandView Sunroof And Power Shade Switches

1 - Sunroof Switch
2 - Power Shade Switch

WARNING!

- Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.

OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF

The sunroof has two programmed automatic stops for the sunroof open position; a comfort stop position and a full open position. The comfort stop position has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting.

Express Open/Close

Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically.

Push the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close

automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically.

During Express Open or Express Close operation, any other movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

Manual Open/Close

To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward to full open.

To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the forward position.

Any release of the switch during open or close operation will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will remain in a partially opened position until the switch is operated and held again.

NOTE:

If the sunshade is in the closed position when Express or Manual Open operation is initiated the sunshade will automatically open to the half open position prior to the sunroof opening.

OPENING AND CLOSING THE POWER SUNSHADE

The sunshade has two programmed positions: half open and full open positions. When operating the sunshade from the closed position, the sunshade will always stop at the half open position regardless of express or manual open operation. The switch must be actuated again to continue on to full open position.

If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade cannot be closed beyond the half open position. Pushing the sunshade close switch when the sunroof is open/vented and the sunshade is at half open position will first automatically close the sunroof prior to the sunshade closing.

Express Open/Close

Push the sunshade switch rearward and release it within one-half second, the sunshade will open to the half open position and stop automatically. Push and release the switch again from the half open position and the sunshade will open to the full open position and stop automatically.

Push the sunshade switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunshade will close automatically.

During Express Open or Express Close operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switches will stop the sunshade in a partially open position.

72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Open/Close

Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward, the sunshade will open to the half open position and stop automatically. Push and hold the sunshade switch again and the sunshade will open to the full open position.

Push and hold the switch forward and the sunshade will close and stop at full closed position.

Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in motion will stop the sunshade in a partially open position.

PINCH PROTECT FEATURE

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.

NOTE:

If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.

VENTING SUNROOF

Push and release the "Vent" button within one-half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called "Express Vent", and it will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

NOTE:

If the sunshade is in the closed position when the vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof opening to the Vent position.

SUNROOF MAINTENANCE

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear out any debris that may have collected in the tracks.

HOOD

To Open The Hood

To open the hood, two latches must be released.

1. Pull the release lever located underneath the driver's side of the instrument panel.

Hood Release

1. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left and lift the hood.

Safety Latch Location

TO CLOSE THE HOOD

Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from the point where the props no longer hold the hood open.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

LIFTGATE

To UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE

The liftgate may be released in several ways:

• Key fob
• Outside handle
• Button on overhead console

The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release handle. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release handle to open. Push the button on the key fob twice within five seconds to release the liftgate.

NOTE:

When you push the button on the liftgate, either only the liftgate will unlock or all doors and the liftgate will unlock, depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect system ▶ page 174.

Passive Entry/Lock Button Location

1 – Electronic Liftgate Release
2 - Lock Button Location

NOTE:

Use the power door lock switch on either front door trim panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the liftgate. The manual door locks on the doors and the driver's door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.

WARNING!

Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.

To Lock/Close The Liftgate

To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate closing handle and pull in a downward motion to close the liftgate.

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry lock button, located next to the electronic release handle, will lock the vehicle.

The power liftgate may be closed by pushing the button, located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening. This button cannot be used to open the liftgate.

NOTE:

The liftgate unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release handle.

POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED

The power liftgate may be opened by pushing the electronic liftgate release handle → page 24, or by pushing the liftgate button on the key fob. Push

the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five seconds to open or close the power liftgate.

NOTE:

• When using the liftgate button on the key fob to open the liftgate while the vehicle is locked, only the liftgate will unlock leaving the other doors to remain locked. Closing the liftgate will not re-lock the liftgate. The lock button on the key fob, or the Passive Entry lock button must be pushed to re-lock.
• If the Passive Entry button is used to open the liftgate and all the doors unlock, the liftgate and vehicle doors must be locked again. Use the key fob, Passive Entry lock button, or the power door lock switches on the front door panels.

The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by pushing the liftgate button located on the front overhead console. If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be closed by pushing the liftgate button located on the left rear trim panel. If the liftgate is in motion, pushing the button again will reverse the liftgate.

When the liftgate button on the key fob is pushed two times, the turn signals will flash to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the

Uconnect Settings), and the liftgate chime will be audible. The chime can be turned on or off through the Uconnect Settings → page 174.

NOTE:

• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftgate trim panel.
• If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power liftgate functionality.

WARNING!

During power operation, personal injury or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away.

NOTE:

• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below -22°F (-30°C) or temperatures above 150°F (65°C) . Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pushing any of the power liftgate switches.
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position. After multiple obstructions in the same cycle, the liftgate will automatically stop and must be opened or closed manually.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
• If the liftgate is only partially open, push the liftgate button on the key fob twice to operate the liftgate.
• If the electronic liftgate release handle is pushed while the power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation.

WARNING!

• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode.

CARGO AREA FEATURES

Cargo Storage Bins — If Equipped

There are up to four removable storage bins located in the rear cargo area. There are two storage bins located on either side of the cargo area.

NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with a rear subwoofer, the storage bin on that side will not be available.

Rear Storage Bin

Two additional storage bins may be located under the load floor. To access the lower storage bins, raise the load floor and attach the tether strap (attached to the bottom of the load floor) to the liftgate opening.

Tether Strap

Rear Lower Storage Bins

Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped

The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo.

To cover the cargo area:

1. Grab the cover at the center handle and pull over the cargo area.

2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in the pillar trim cover.

3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in place.

Rear Cargo Cover

WARNING!

In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.

Rear Cargo Tie-Downs

The rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor, should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving.

Rear Cargo Tie-Downs

WARNING!

- To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

- Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.

The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:

• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway.

WARNING! (Continued)

- Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED

The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry loads on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.

NOTE:

If not equipped with crossbars, an authorized dealer can order and install Mopar® crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system.

Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.

To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight turns using the anti-theft wrench provided with the Mopar® crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the crossbar is in the desired position, retighten with the wrench to lock the crossbar into position.

NOTE:

• To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in use, place the front and rear crossbars approximately 24 inches (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar forward or rearward using increments of 1 inch (2.5 cm).
• If any cargo (or any metallic object) is placed over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For improved satellite radio reception, avoid placing the rear crossbar over the satellite radio antenna.

WARNING!

Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.

CAUTION!

- To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do not carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars installed. The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof, place a blanket or some other protection between the load and the roof surface.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the wind-shield, such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
• The use of Sport Mode is not recommended when using the Roof Luggage Rack to carry a load.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE

A0301000086US
Gasoline Instrument Cluster

80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

1. Tachometer

- Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000).

2. Speedometer

- Indicates vehicle speed.

3. Temperature Gauge

- The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

- The pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats → page 359.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads "H" pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the "H", turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.

4. Fuel Gauge

- The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.

- The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located - page 151.

5. Instrument Cluster Display

- The instrument cluster display features a driver interactive display ➤ page 81.

Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls

1 - Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 - Instrument Cluster Display Screen

NOTE:

The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles or kilometers in the odometer. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll

through the main menus and submenus. You can access the specific information you want and make selections and adjustments

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY LOCATION AND CONTROLS

The instrument cluster display is located in the center of the instrument cluster.

Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls

1 - Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 - Instrument Cluster Display Screen

1. The interactive display area to the left side of the screen depicts which menus are being accessed in the main display area.
2. The top line where reconfigurable telltales, compass direction, outside temperature, Time, Range MPG or Trip are displayed. This also displays the speedometer when other menu pages are displayed.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81

1. The main display area where the menus and pop up messages are displayed.
2. The lower line where reconfigurable telltales, menu name and menu page are displayed.

The Main Menu items selectable in the driver interactive display consist of the following:

• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Terrain — If Equipped
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Stop/Start — If Equipped
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• Speed Warning

82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:

Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons

Up And Down Arrow Buttons:

Using the up or down arrow button allows you to cycle through the Main Menu Items.

Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title area.

Left And Right Arrow Buttons:

Using the left or right arrow button allows you to cycle through the submenu items of the Main menu item.

NOTE:

• Holding the up/down or left/right arrow button will loop the user through the currently selected menu or options presented on the screen.
• Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu screen viewed within that main menu will be displayed.
• OK Button

Push the OK button to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. To reset displayed/selected features push and hold the OK button for two seconds.

OIL CHANGE RESET — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The "Oil Change Required" message will display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.

Oil Life Reset

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the ON/RUN mode (do not start the engine).
2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle Info" in the instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge resets to 100%.

Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Procedure

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE:

If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU ITEMS

The instrument cluster display can be used to view the main menu items for several features. Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the driver interactive display menu options until the desired menu is reached.

NOTE:

Depending on the vehicle's options, feature settings may vary.

Main Gauge

Non - SRT

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the main gauge menu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster display.

Push and release the left or right arrow button to select the analog or digital type speedometer display.

Push and release the OK button to toggle units (mph or km/h) of the speedometer.

Vehicle Info

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow button to scroll through the information submenus and push and release the OK button to select or reset the submenus.

NON – SRT
● Tire Pressure ● Oil Temperature	Pressure
● Transmission Temperature	● Oil Life
● Oil Temperature ●	Battery Voltage

Terrain — If Equipped

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Terrain icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the right or left arrow button to display the Selec-Track or Drivetrain.

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Terrain icon/title is highlighted

in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the right or left arrow button to display the Selec-Terrain, Air Suspension, Drivetrain, and Wheel Articulation.

Non-SRT

• Selec-Terrain: Displays messages concerning Selec-Terrain status.
• Air Suspension — If Equipped: Displays messages concerning Air Suspension status.
• Drivetrain: Displays information on drivetrain status of Front Wheel Angle, T-Case, and Axle Lock.
• Wheel Articulation: Displays current wheel articulation.

Driver Assist

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Driver Assist menu title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If Equipped

The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC and LaneSense system settings. The information displayed depends on the status of ACC and LaneSense.

Push the ACC on/off button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the instrument cluster display:

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

When ACC is deactivated, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Off."

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Ready."

Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the instrument cluster display:

ACC SET

When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster.

The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following:

• System Cancel
• Driver Override

• System Off

• ACC Proximity Warning

• ACC Unavailable Warning

NOTE:

The instrument cluster display will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity ➤ page 125.

LaneSense — If Equipped

The instrument cluster display displays the current LaneSense system settings. The information displayed depends on LaneSense system status and the conditions that need to be met ➤ page 146.

Fuel Economy

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Fuel Economy Icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and hold the OK button to reset average fuel economy feature.

Toggle left or right to select a display with or without Current Fuel Economy Information.

- Range – The display shows the estimated distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. When the Range value is less than 30 miles (48 km)

estimated driving distance, the Range display will change to a "RANGE LOW" message. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the "RANGE LOW" message and a new Range value will display. Range cannot be reset through the OK button.

NOTE:

Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.

• Average – The display shows the average fuel economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since the last reset.
• Current – This display shows the current fuel economy (MPG, L/100 km, km/L) while driving.

Trip Info

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Toggle the left or right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the following:

• Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
• Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
• Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.

Hold the OK button to reset feature information.

Stop / Start — If Equipped

Press and release the up or

down arrow button on the steering wheel to scroll to the Stop/Start menu

in the driver interactive display. This menu will give access to Stop/Start settings using the left and right arrow buttons on the steering wheel ➤ page 120.

Audio

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Audio menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster display.

Stored Messages

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing the left or

right arrow button will allow you to scroll through the stored messages.

Screen Setup

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display.

Push and release the OK button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed.

Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items

Gear Display

Full
- Single

Upper Left

• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip A
• Trip B

Upper Right

• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range
• Fuel Economy Average

86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip A
• Trip B

Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)

• Cancel
• Restore

Current Gear

• On
• Off

Favorite Menus

• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Terrain (show/hide)
• Driver Assist (show/hide)
  • Fuel Economy (show/hide)
• Trip Info (show/hide)
• Stop/Start

• Audio (show/hide)

• Messages

• Screen Setup
• Speed Warning

The menu with (show/hide) means user can press OK button to choose show or hide this menu on the instrument cluster display.

BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER MODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD REDUCTION ACTIONS (IF EQUIPPED)

This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.

In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.

Load reduction is only active when the engine is running. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current drive cycle. When load reduction is activated, the message "Battery Saver On" or "Battery Saver Mode" will appear in the instrument cluster display.

These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.

NOTE:

• The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate a problem with the charging system ↩ page 89.

The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be effected by load reduction:

• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
  • Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
  • 150W Power Inverter System
  • Audio and Telematics System

Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the following conditions:

• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads are larger than the capability of charging system. The charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time (weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on when the vehicle was parked.

- The battery was used for an extended period with the engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum cleaner's, game consoles and similar devices.

What to do when an electrical load reduction action message is present ("Battery Saver On" or "Battery Saver Mode")

During a trip:

- Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:

• Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
• Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
• Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
• Check the audio settings (volume)

After a trip:

• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time and parking time).

- The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecutive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not help to identify the cause.

TRIP COMPUTER

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip A or Trip B icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B).

Trip A/Trip B

• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A/Trip B since the last reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A/Trip B since the last reset.
• Shows average fuel consumption for Trip A/Trip B since the last reset.
• Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position.

To Reset Trip A/B Function

Reset will only occur while a function is selected. Push and hold the OK button to clear the function being displayed.

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES

The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.

RED WARNING LIGHTS

Air Bag Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Brake Warning Light

This warning light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE:

The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE:

This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

Battery Charge Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.

Door Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.

NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.

Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light

This warning light will turn on when there's a fault with the EPS system page 120.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem with the ETC system. If a problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light will

either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

NOTE:

This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are pressed at the same time.

If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light

This warning light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to cool; whichever comes first.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service ↩ page 335.

Hood Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.

NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.

Liftgate Open Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate when the liftgate is open.

NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.

Oil Pressure Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as

possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

Oil Temperature Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate the engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels.

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or

ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound page 285.

Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to drive normally.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.

CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped

This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security system is arming, and then will flash slowly until the

vehicle is disarmed.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91

YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS

Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light

This light will turn on when the ACC system is not operating and needs service ▶ page 125.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

This warning light monitors the ABS. The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on for as

long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required as soon as possible. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.

If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light will indicate when the ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

• The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.

92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light indicates the ESC is off.

Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously.

Service LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate when the LaneSense system is not operating and requires service. Please see an authorized dealer.

LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped

The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yellow when the vehicle is approaching a lane marker. The warning light will flash when the

vehicle is crossing the lane marker page 146.

Low Fuel Warning Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.

A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel Warning.

Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low page 348.

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)

The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and

automatic transmission control systems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.

When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this occurs.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.

Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the Forward Collision Warning System. Contact an authorized dealer for service → page 279.

Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate when the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized

dealer for service.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light

The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire.

CAUTION!

Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat

and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.

YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS

Air Suspension Active Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is actively adjusting the ride height ➤ page 115.

Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light—If Equipped

This light will illuminate when the vehicle is automatically lowered from ride height position downward for easy entry and exit of the vehicle.

Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator Light—If Equipped

This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is set to the Aerodynamic setting ↙ page 115.

Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is set to the Off-Road 1 setting ▼ page 115.

Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is set to the Off-Road 2 setting ➕ page 115.

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator light illuminates to indicate that FCW is off → page 279.

4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the 4WD LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing

the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels ↩ page 112.

NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the 4WD power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL mode and the front and rear driveshafts are disengaged

from the powertrain.

GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is set and there is no vehicle in front detected page 125.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light — If Equipped

This will display when the ACC is set and a vehicle in front is detected ▶ page 125.

Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control is set to the desired speed ↩ page 122.

Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog lights are on page 49.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95

LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped

The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is “armed” and ready

to provide visual and torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs page 146.

Park/Headlight On Indicator Light

This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on ➤ page 49.

Snow Mode Indicator Light

This light will turn on when Snow Mode is active.

Sport Mode Indicator Light

This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active ➤ page 112.

Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in "Autostop" mode ➤ page 120.

96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Tow Mode Indicator Light

This light will turn on when Tow Mode is active.

Track Mode Indicator Light

This light will turn on when Track Mode is active.

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn signal indicator will flash independently and the corresponding exterior turn signal

lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).

NOTE:

• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped

This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with ACC has been turned on, but not set ↩ page 125.

Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light

This light will turn on when the cruise control has been turned on, but not set ➤ page 122.

Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator shows when the HDC feature is turned on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD LOW position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.

LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped

When the LaneSense system is ON, but not armed, the LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid white. This occurs when only left, right, or neither lane line has been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs on the detected lane line page 146.

Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light will turn on when "Selec-Speed Control" is activated.

To activate "Selec-Speed Control", assure the vehicle is Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Low and push the button on the Instrument Panel.

NOTE:

If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, "To Enter Select-Speed Shift to 4WD Low" will appear in the instrument cluster display.

BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS

High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated, push the multifunction

lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) CYBERSECURITY

Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system ↩ page 173.

WARNING!

• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.

The OBD II may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Switch the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.

NOTE:

If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.

1. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

2. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:

- The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.

- The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.

WARNING!

• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then shift the automatic transmission into PARK and apply the parking brake.
• Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode, key fob is removed from the vehicle and vehicle is locked.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P) position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed.
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

NORMAL STARTING

To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button

1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.

100 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
2. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP button again.

To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP Button

1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
2. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with vehicle stopped) and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once, the transmission will automatically select PARK and the engine will turn off, however the ignition will remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF mode). Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.

3. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once will turn the engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode.

4. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two seconds (or three short pushes in a row) to turn the engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF mode) if the engine is turned off when the transmission is not in PARK.

NOTE:

The system will automatically time out and the ignition will cycle to the OFF mode after 30 minutes of inactivity if the ignition is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) mode and the transmission is in PARK.

ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver's Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)

The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these steps:

1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode

2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place the ignition to the ACC mode (instrument cluster will display "ACC")

3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to place the ignition to the RUN mode (instrument cluster will display "ON/RUN")

4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF mode (instrument cluster will display "OFF")

NOTE:

Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning message will display in the instrument cluster ↩ page 81.

AUTO PARK

AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the vehicle in PARK if the below occur. It is a back up system and should not be relied upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.

The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are outlined on the following pages.

WARNING!

• Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not blinking) "P" is indicated in the instrument cluster display and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and should not be relied upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.

If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.

AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:

• Vehicle is equipped with an eight-speed transmission
• Vehicle is not in PARK

● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
- Ignition switched from RUN to ACC

NOTE:

For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the engine will turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC mode.

If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may AutoPark.

AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:

• Vehicle is equipped with an eight-speed transmission
• Vehicle is not in PARK
  ● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
• Driver's seat belt is unbuckled
• Driver's door is ajar
• Brake pedal is not pressed

The message "AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear" will display in the instrument cluster.

NOTE:

In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in the instrument cluster. In these cases, the shifter must be returned to "P" to select desired gear.

If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may AutoPark.

AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.

The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).

WARNING!

If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.

4WD LOW — If Equipped

AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in 4WD LOW.

The message "AutoPark Disabled" will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

Additional customer warnings will be given when both of these conditions are met:

• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Driver's door is ajar

The message "AutoPark Not Engaged" will be displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the driver's door is closed.

ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument cluster display and on the shifter. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.

IF ENGINE FAILS TO START

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedure, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the RUN position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.

WARNING!

• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly → page 332.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds before trying again.

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.

AFTER STARTING

The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will decrease as the engine warms up.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.

The engine block heater cord is located:

• 3.6L Engine — Bundled and strapped behind the engine air cleaner assembly.
• 5.7L Engine — Bundled and strapped in front of the power distribution center.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant installed at the factory is high-quality and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur ➔ page 408.

CAUTION!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result.

NOTE:

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during the break-in period. Add oil as required.

PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the PARK (P) position.

The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the parking brake, firmly push the parking brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.

Parking Brake

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON mode, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.

WARNING!

- Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

CAUTION!

If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

- Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK

This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode.

NOTE:

The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC mode) before exiting the vehicle.

This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.

FUEL ECONOMY (ECO) MODE

The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehicle's overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions. Push the "ECO" switch in the center stack of the instrument panel to activate or disable ECO mode. A light on the switch indicates when ECO mode is disabled.

Fuel Economy Mode Switch—Non-SRT

When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the vehicle control systems will change the following:

• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift later.
• The overall driving performance will be more conservative.
• Vehicles with Quadra-Lift air suspension will operate in "Aero" mode over a broader speed range ➤ page 115.
• Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhibited based on temperature and other factors.

Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) — If Equipped

The ANC system uses four microphones embedded in the headliner to detect undesirable exhaust noise, which sometimes occurs when operating in specific driving conditions such as ECO and Tow mode. An on-board frequency generator creates counteracting sound waves through the audio system to help keep the vehicle quiet.

The transmission gear range is displayed both beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear selector and move the selector rearward or forward. To shift the transmission out of PARK (P), the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed. You must also press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL (N) into DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R) when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.

NOTE:

• The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
• In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector position and the actual transmission gear (for example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be completed.

The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental and road conditions.

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.

The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and MANUAL (M) or SPORT (S) (AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or

rearward (+) while in the MANUAL or SPORT (AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE position), or tapping the shift paddles (+/-), (if equipped) will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster → page 111.

Gear Selector

NOTE:

If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward), it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.

Gear Ranges

Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting out of PARK or NEUTRAL.

NOTE:

After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK (P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

When exiting the vehicle, always:

• Apply the parking brake

• Shift the transmission into PARK

• Turn the ignition OFF

• Remove the key fob from the vehicle

NOTE:

On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

- Before moving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result.

CAUTION! (Continued)

• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK position:

• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the gear selector and firmly move the selector all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not blinking.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. For Recreational Towing page 163. For Towing A Disabled Vehicle page 338.

DRIVE (D)

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear → page 111. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

During extremely cold temperatures ( -22° F [-30° C] or below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

MANUAL (M) OR SPORT (S) — IF EQUIPPED

The MANUAL (M, +/-) or SPORT (S, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE position) enables full manual control of transmission shifting (also known as AutoStick mode ➤ page 111). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL or SPORT (AutoStick) position will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster.

Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

NOTE:

In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired location (preferably, at an authorized dealer):

1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if possible. If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.

NOTE:

Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your transmission. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.

AutoStick

AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.

Shift Paddles

Operation

In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear selector (in the MANUAL or SPORT position), or the shift paddles (if equipped), to manually shift the transmission. To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into the MANUAL (M) or SPORT (S) position (beside the DRIVE position), or tap one of the shift paddles on the steering wheel (if equipped). Tapping the (-) shift paddle (if equipped) to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, while tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The current transmission gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

AutoStick mode has the following operational benefits:

• The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.

- You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND gear (or THIRD gear, in 4L range, SNOW mode, or SAND mode). Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND or THIRD gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.

- If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.

- The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.

- Holding the (-) paddle pressed (if equipped), or holding the gear selector in the (-) position, will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed.

112 STARTING AND OPERATING

● Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is enabled.
- The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected.

NOTE:

When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick is not active.

To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector to the DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped, and the gear selector is already in DRIVE) until "D" is once again indicated in the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of AutoStick at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.

SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED

SPORT Mode Button

Your vehicle is equipped with a SPORT Mode feature. The engine, transmission, and steering systems are all set to their SPORT settings. SPORT Mode will provide improved throttle response and modified transmission shift points for an enhanced driving experience, as well as a greater amount of steering feel. This mode may be activated and deactivated by pushing the SPORT button on the instrument panel switch bank.

The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range only) transfer case, which provides convenient full-time four-wheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with traction.

NOTE:

The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate for conditions where 4WD LOW range is recommended ⇒ page 168.

QUADRA-TRAC II OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS / PRECAUTIONS — IF EQUIPPED

The Quadra-Trac II transfer case is fully automatic in the normal driving 4WD AUTO mode. The Quadra-Trac II transfer case provides three mode positions:

• 4WD AUTO
• NEUTRAL
• 4WD LOW

When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOW position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD AUTO position at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.

SHIFT POSITIONS

For additional information on the appropriate use of each 4WD system mode position, see the information below:

4WD AUTO

This range is the default operating mode for daily use.

NEUTRAL

This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain. It is used for towing your vehicle behind another vehicle ➔ page 163.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.

4WD LOW

This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides an additional gear reduction which allows for increased torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels while providing maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

SHIFTING PROCEDURES

4WD HI To 4WD LOW

With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running, shift the transmission into "N", and push the "4WD LOW" button once on the transfer case switch. The "4WD LOW" indicator light in the instrument cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is complete.

Transfer Case Switch

NOTE:

If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists, a "For 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in "N" Press 4 Low" message will flash from the instrument cluster display → page 81.

4WD LOW To 4WD HI

With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and push the "4WD LOW" button once on the transfer case switch. The "4WD LOW" indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash and go out when the shift is complete.

NOTE:

• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists, a "For 4x4 High Slow Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in NEUTRAL push 4 Low" message will flash from the instrument cluster display ➤ page 81.
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow the shift.

The Quadra-Drive II System features two torque transfer couplings. The couplings include an Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) rear axle and the Quadra-Trac II transfer case. The ELSD axle is fully automatic and requires no driver input to operate. Under normal driving

conditions, the unit functions as a standard axle, balancing torque evenly between left and right wheels. With a traction difference between left and right wheels, the coupling will sense a speed difference. As one wheel begins to spin faster than the other, torque will automatically transfer from the wheel that has less traction, to the wheel that has traction. While the transfer case and axle coupling differ in design, their operation is similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac II transfer case shifting information, preceding this section, for shifting this system.

QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED

DESCRIPTION

The Quadra-Lift air suspension system provides full time load leveling capability along with the benefit of vehicle height adjustment by the push of a button. The vehicle will automatically raise and lower the ride height to adapt to the appropriate driving conditions. At higher speeds, the vehicle will lower to an aerodynamic ride height and when operating in off-road modes, the vehicle will raise the ride height accordingly. The buttons near the terrain switch in the center console area can be used to set preferred ride height to match the appropriate conditions.

Selec-Terrain Switch

1 - UP Button
2 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
3 - Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
4 - Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
5 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
6 - DOWN Button

• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard position of the suspension and is meant for normal driving.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately 1.1 inches (28 mm)) – This is the primary position for all off-road driving until OR2 is needed. A smoother and more comfortable ride will result. Push the "UP" button once from the NRH position while the vehicle speed is below 38 mph (61 km/h). When in the OR1 position, if the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be automatically lowered to NRH page 167.

• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately 2.2 inches (55 mm)) – This position is intended for off-roading use only where maximum ground clearance is required. To enter OR2, push the "UP" button twice from the NRH position or once from the OR1 position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to OR1 page 167.

• Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 0.6 inches (15 mm)) – This position provides improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 52 mph (83 km/h) and 56 mph (90 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 56 mph (90 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 20 mph (32 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h). The vehicle will enter Aero Mode, regardless of vehicle speed if the vehicle is in “SPORT” mode.

• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 1.6 inches (40 mm) – This position lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the "DOWN" button once from (NRH) while the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle

speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Entry/Exit Mode change will be canceled. To exit Entry/Exit Mode, press the "Up" button once while in Entry/Exit Mode or drive the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h).

NOTE:

Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/Exit Mode can be enabled through the Uconnect Touchscreen Radio. If this feature is enabled, the vehicle will only lower if the gear selector is in "PARK", the terrain switch is in "AUTO", the transfer case is in "AUTO" and the vehicle level should be either in Normal or Aero Mode. The vehicle will not automatically lower if the air suspension level is in OR2 or OR1. If the vehicle is equipped with Intrusion Theft Module (ITM), the lowering will be suppressed when the ignition is switched OFF and the door is open to prevent setting the alarm off.

The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically change the vehicle to the proper height based on the position of the Selec-Terrain switch. The height can be changed from the default Selec-Terrain setting by normal use of the air suspension buttons ➔ page 119.

The system requires that the engine be running for all changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors, including the liftgate, must be closed. If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed until the open door(s) is/are closed.

The Quadra-Lift air suspension system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first and then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will move down first and then the rear.

After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly; this is normal. The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.

To assist with changing a spare tire, the Quadra-Lift air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled ➤ page 174.

NOTE:

If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio ➤ page 174.

WARNING!

The air suspension system uses a high pressure volume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal injury or damage to the system, see an authorized dealer for service.

AIR SUSPENSION MODES

The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect the system in unique situations:

Tire/Jack Mode

To assist with changing a spare tire or setting up trailer weight distribution bars, the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled ➕ page 174.

NOTE:

This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine running.

Auto Entry/Exit Mode

To assist in entering and exiting the vehicle, the air suspension system has a feature which automatically lowers the vehicle to entry/exit ride height ↩ page 174.

NOTE:

This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine running.

Transport Mode

To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension system has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic load leveling system page 174.

NOTE:

This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine running.

Suspension Display Messages Mode

The "Suspension Display Messages" setting allows you to only display suspension warnings → page 174.

NOTE:

This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine running.

Wheel Alignment Mode

Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled ➤ page 174.

NOTE:

This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine running.

If equipped with a touchscreen radio all enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio ➤ page 174.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MESSAGES

When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will appear in the instrument cluster ➤ page 81.

OPERATION

The indicator lamps 2 through 5 will illuminate to show the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator lamps will show a position which the system is working to achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are flashing on the "UP" button, the highest flashing indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve. When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing on the "DOWN" button the lowest solid indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.

Pushing the "UP" button once will move the suspension one position higher from the current position, assuming all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, speed below threshold, etc). The "UP" button can be pushed multiple times. Each push will raise the requested level by one position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).

Pushing the "DOWN" button once will move the suspension one position lower from the current level, assuming all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, doors closed, speed below threshold, etc). The "DOWN" button can be pressed multiple times. Each push will lower the requested level by one position down to a minimum of Park Mode or the lowest position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)

Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps and instrument cluster display messages will operate the same for automatic changes and user requested changes.

• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 2, 3, and 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamp 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in this position.

- Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry/Exit Mode. If Entry/Exit Mode is requested while vehicle speed is between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h), indicator lamp 4 will remain on solid and indicator lamp 5 will flash as the system waits for the vehicle to reduce speed. If vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will turn off and indicator lamp 5 will flash until Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at which point indicator lamp 5 will go solid.

If during the height change to Entry/Exit Mode, the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h), the height change will be paused until the vehicle speed either goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) and the height change continues to Entry/Exit Mode, or exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) and the vehicle height will return to NRH. Entry/Exit Mode may be selected while the vehicle is not moving provided that the engine is still running and all doors remain closed.

• Transport Mode - No indicator lamps will be illuminated. Customer driving will disable Transport Mode.
• Tire/Jack Mode - Indicator lamps 2 and 5 will be illuminated. Customer driving will disable Tire/Jack Mode.
• Wheel Alignment Mode - Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be illuminated. Customer driving will disable Wheel Alignment Mode.

SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED

SELEC-TERRAIN MODE SELECTION

Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to provide the best performance for all terrains.

Selec-Terrain Switch

Selec-Terrain consists of the following positions:

- SNOW - Tuning set for additional stability in inclement weather. Use on and off-road on loose traction surfaces such as snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on certain operating conditions), the transmission may use

SECOND gear (rather than FIRST gear) during launches, to minimize wheel slippage. If equipped with air suspension, the default ride height for SNOW is Normal Ride Height (NRH).

• AUTO – Fully automatic full-time four-wheel drive operation can be used on and off-road. Balances traction with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel drive vehicles. If equipped with air suspension, the level will change to Normal Ride Height (NRH).
• SAND - Off-road calibration for use on low traction surfaces such as sand or wet grass. Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set to limit traction control management of throttle and wheel spin. If equipped with air suspension, the default ride height for SAND is Normal Ride Height (NRH).
• MUD – Off-road calibration for use on low traction surfaces such as mud. Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic

brake controls are set to limit traction control management of throttle and wheel spin. If equipped with air suspension, the level will change to OR1.

- ROCK - Off-road calibration is only available in 4WD LOW range. The vehicle is raised (if equipped with Air Suspension) for improved ground clearance. Traction based tuning with improved steerability for use on high traction off-road surfaces. Use for low speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If equipped with air suspension, the vehicle level will change to Off-Road 2. If the Selec-Terrain switch is in ROCK mode, and the transfer case is switched from 4WD LOW to 4WD AUTO, the Selec-Terrain system will return to AUTO.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MESSAGES

When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will appear in the instrument cluster → page 81.

FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY — IF EQUIPPED

This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver inputs.

NOTE:

This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect.

POWER STEERING

The electric power steering system will provide increased vehicle response and ease of maneuverability. The power steering system adapts to different driving conditions and adjusts accordingly.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected through the Uconnect System page 174.

If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is displayed and the "SERVICE POWER STEERING" or the "POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE

SYSTEM" message is displayed within the instrument cluster display, this indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service → page 88.

NOTE:

• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for service.

If the Steering icon is displayed and the "POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP" message is displayed on the instrument cluster screen, this indicates an over temperature condition in the power steering system.

Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off.

STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically re-start the engine.

This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy duty starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional engine starts.

AUTOSTOP MODE

The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every driver ignition start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/START READY.

To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:

- The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section ➤ page 81.

• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• The gear selector must be in DRIVE (D) and the brake pedal pressed.

The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition.

POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES NOT AUTOSTOP

Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start Screen. Situations when the engine will not stop, include (but not limited to):

• Driver's seat belt is not buckled.
• Driver's door is not closed.
  ● Battery temperature is too warm or cold.

• Battery charge is low.
  ● The vehicle is on a steep grade.

• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable cabin temperature has not been achieved.

• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
  • HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
• The transmission is not in a forward gear.
• Hood is open.
  ● Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
  • Engine temperature too high.
• 5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from previous Autostop.
• Accelerator pedal input.
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
• Vehicle at a higher altitude.

• Ambient temperature is outside operating range.

• Gear selector in MANUAL (M) mode.

• Stop/Start related system malfunction.

It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/START READY state under more extreme conditions of the items listed above.

TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN AUTOSTOP MODE

While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is pressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage upon engine restart.

Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Automatically While In Autostop Mode:

• The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
  • HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually adjusted.
• Battery voltage drops too low.

122 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
• Stop/Start related system malfunction.
• 4WD system is put into 4WD LOW mode.

TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/ START SYSTEM

Stop/Start OFF Switch

Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The "Stop/Start OFF" message will appear in instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section, and the autostop function will be disabled → page 81.

NOTE:

The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON condition every time the ignition is turned OFF and back ON.

TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/ START SYSTEM

Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the system will not shut down the engine. A "SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM" message will appear in the instrument cluster display ➤ page 88.

If the "SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM" message appears in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the vehicle may not auto start and will need a key start.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:

• Cruise Control for cruising at a constant preset speed.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for maintaining a set distance between you and the vehicle ahead using Fixed Speed Cruise Control to automatically adjust the preset speed.

NOTE:

In vehicles equipped with ACC, if an ACC distance is not set, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the mode selected.

CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).

The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.

Cruise Control Buttons

1 - On/Off
2 - CANC/Cancel
3 - SET (+)/Accel
4 - RES/Resume
5 - SET (-)/Decel

NOTE:

In order to ensure proper operation, the Cruise Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Cruise Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Cruise Control system can be reactivated by pushing the Cruise Control on/off button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

WARNING!

Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

To Activate

Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control. "CRUISE CONTROL READY" will appear in the instrument cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is on. To turn the system off, push the on/off button a second time. "CRUISE CONTROL OFF" will appear in the instrument cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always ensure the system is off when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push and release the SET (+) or SET (-) button. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set, a message "CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)" will appear indicating the set speed. A cruise indicator lamp, along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set.

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed

When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to adjust until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

- Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.

- If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to adjust until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

To Accelerate For Passing

While the Cruise Control system is set, press the accelerator to pass as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Using Cruise Control On Hills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.

The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.

WARNING!

Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Deactivate

A tap on the brake pedal, or pushing the CANC button, or normal brake pressure will deactivate the Cruise Control system without erasing the set speed from memory.

Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition switch in the OFF position erases the set speed from memory.

The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise Control without erasing the set speed from memory:

● Vehicle parking brake is applied
- Stability event occurs
- Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
• Engine overspeed occurs

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control function performs differently page 122.

ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your Cruise Control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you to maintain a set speed.

NOTE:

- If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.

• Any chassis / suspension or tire size modifications to the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning system.
• Fixed Speed Cruise Control alone (an ACC distance not set) will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the mode selected ➤ page 414.

WARNING!

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active driver involvement. It is always the driver's responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

- The ACC system:

• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for two seconds in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not start moving within two seconds the ACC system will display a message that the system will release the brakes and that the brakes must be applied manually. An audible chime will sound when the brakes are released.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

You should switch off the ACC system:

• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation

The Cruise Control buttons (located on the right side of the steering wheel) operate the ACC system.

Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons

1 - CANC/Cancel
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
3 - Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 – Distance Decrease
5 - SET (+)/Accel
6 - RES/Resume
7 - SET (-)/Decel
8 - Distance Increase

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu

The instrument cluster display shows the current ACC system settings. The information it displays depends on ACC system status.

Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button until one of the following appears in the instrument cluster display:

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

When ACC is deactivated, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Off."

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Ready."

Adaptive Cruise Control Set

When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the display will read "ACC SET."

When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument cluster display.

The ACC screen may display once again if any of the following ACC activity occurs:

• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning

The instrument cluster display will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity.

Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph (32 km/h).

When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the instrument cluster displays "ACC Ready."

When the system is off, the instrument cluster displays "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off."

NOTE:

You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:

• When in 4WD Low
• When the brakes are applied
• When the parking brake is applied
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL

• When the vehicle speed is below the minimum speed range

• When the brakes are overheated

• When the driver's door is open at low speeds
• When the driver's seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
• When ESC Full Off mode is active

To Activate/Deactivate

Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster displays "ACC Ready."

To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the system will turn off and the instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”

WARNING!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have a collision. Always ensure the system is off when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired Speed

When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument cluster display will show the set speed.

NOTE:

Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without an ACC distance set. To change between the different modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.

WARNING!

In the Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.

If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph (20 km/h).

NOTE:

Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below 20 mph (32 km/h).

If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle.

NOTE:

• Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the message "DRIVER OVERRIDE" will display in the instrument cluster display.
• If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed while an ACC distance is also set, the system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.

To Cancel

The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed Cruise Control systems:

● The brake pedal is applied
- The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
● The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
- The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position
- The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates
● The vehicle parking brake is applied
• The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
● The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
- The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated)

The following conditions will only cancel the ACC system:

- Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds

- Driver door is opened at low speeds

To Turn Off

The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:

• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is pushed
• The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is pushed
• The ignition is placed in the OFF position
• 4WD Low is engaged

To Resume

If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES (resume) button and remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display will show the last set speed.

Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is being used.

Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph (0 km/h) when ACC is active.

NOTE:

• While in ACC mode when the vehicle comes to a complete stop longer than two seconds, the system will cancel. The driver will have to apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.

WARNING!

The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed

While ACC is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.

NOTE:

When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed of the vehicle.

When An ACC Distance Is Also Set:

• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the engine's braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop when following the vehicle in front. If your vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill, after two seconds the driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).

Setting The Following Distance In ACC

The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.

Distance Settings

1 – Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 - Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 – Short Distance Setting (One Bar)

To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Increase button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).

To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).

If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane, the instrument cluster display will show the ACC Set With Target Detected Light. The system will then adjust vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.

The vehicle will then maintain the distance set by the driver until:

• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages ➤ page 127.

The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary.

NOTE:

The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes.

A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking force.

NOTE:

The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the brakes autonomously.

Overtake Aid

When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration

is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on the left hand side.

ACC Operation At Stop

If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will resume motion, without any driver interaction, if the vehicle ahead starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill.

If the vehicle in front does not start moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime. The driver must now manually operate the vehicle's accelerator and brakes.

While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime. The driver must now manually operate the vehicle's accelerator and brakes.

WARNING!

When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

Display Warnings And Maintenance

"Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle" Warning

The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” warning will display and a chime will sound when conditions temporarily limit system performance.

This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will display the above message and the system will deactivate.

This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels with reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.

NOTE:

If the "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available.

If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille.

To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:

• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment.

132 STARTING AND OPERATING

• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision, see an authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.

When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by simply reactivating it.

NOTE:

• If the "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.

"Clean Front Windshield" Warning

The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” warning will display and a chime will sound when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance.

This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.

If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the windshield and the camera located on the back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.

When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present, the system will return to full functionality.

NOTE:

If the "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected at an authorized dealer.

Service ACC/FCW Warning

If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays "ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required" or "Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required", there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.

Precautions While Driving With ACC

In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.

The following are examples of these types of situations:

Towing A Trailer

Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.

Offset Driving

ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.

Offset Driving Condition Example

Turns And Bends

When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stability, with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.

NOTE:

On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.

Using ACC On Hills

ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hill.

134 STARTING AND OPERATING

Lane Changing

ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the lane changing example below, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Lane Changing Example

Narrow Vehicles

Some narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles, traveling near the outer edges of the lane or merging into the lane are not detected until they have moved to the center of the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.

Narrow Vehicle Example

Stationary Objects And Vehicles

ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example

PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear, and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver). The vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an obstacle.

NOTE:

• The driver can disable the automatic braking function by turning ParkSense off via the ParkSense switch. The driver can also override automatic braking by shifting out of REVERSE or by pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its capacity during the braking event.
• Automatic brakes are not available if ESC is not available.

• Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle is in 4WD Low.

• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park Assist system or the Braking System Module.

• The automatic braking function may only be applied if the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/disabled from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect system.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state for the automatic braking function through ignition cycles.

The automatic braking function is intended to assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.

NOTE:

• The system is designed to assist the driver and not to substitute the driver.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's acceleration and braking and is responsible for the vehicle's movements.

For limitations of this system and recommendations, see ➤ page 141.

ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these gear selector positions, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). A display warning will appear in the instrument cluster display if the vehicle is in REVERSE and the speed exceeds 7 mph (11 km/h).

PARKSENSE SENSORS

The six ParkSense sensors (there may only be four, depending on the vehicle options), located in the rear fascia/bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors located in the front fascia/bumper (if equipped), monitor the area in front and behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The front sensors detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. These distances depend on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle in the horizontal direction.

PARKSENSE DISPLAY

The warning display will turn on indicating the system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions based on the object's distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.

Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs

1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 - No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 - Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

A0629000263US

138 STARTING AND OPERATING

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance (inches/cm)	Greater than 79 inches (200 cm)	79-59 inches (200-150 cm)	59-47 inches (150-120 cm)	47-39 inches (120-100 cm)	39-25 inches (100-65 cm)	25-12 inches (65-30 cm)	Less than 12 inches (30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime	None	Single 1/2 Second Tone	Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None	None None None	None 6th Flashing	5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None	10th Solid 9th Solid	Solid 8th Solid	7th Flashing 6th	Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right	None None	None None None	6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced	No	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes

WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance (inches/cm)	Greater than 47 inches (120 cm)	47-39 inches (120-100 cm)	39-25 inches (100-65 cm)	25-12 inches (65-30 cm)	Less than 12 inches (30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None	None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None	None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None	1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None	None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced	No No No	Yes Yes

NOTE:

ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

Front Park Assist Audible Alerts

ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.

Adjustable Chime Volume Settings

Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the Uconnect system ▷ page 174.

The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.

ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.

PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY

The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from within the Uconnect system ➕ page 174.

The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display ↩ page 81. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.

ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE

ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch.

When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for approximately five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will display the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

NOTE:

When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector is moved to the DRIVE position, no warning message will be displayed.

The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.

SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM

During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will display a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the front or rear sensor location depending on where the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.

If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.

CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM

Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE PRECAUTIONS

NOTE:

• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster will display "PARKSENSE OFF." Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.

• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument cluster will display "PARKSENSE OFF" for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.

• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the open position. An opened liftgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.

PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space, providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes.

Depending on the driver's parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).

NOTE:

• The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and must intervene as required.
• The system is designed to assist the driver and not to substitute the driver.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver touches the steering wheel after being instructed to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the driver will be required to manually complete the parking maneuver.
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking space that has surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).

- New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accurately. This is due to the system's dynamic vehicle calibration to improve the performance of the feature. The system will also continuously perform the dynamic vehicle calibration to account for differences such as over or under inflated tires and new tires.

ENABLING AND DISABLING THE PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM

The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch, located on the switch panel

below the Uconnect display.

To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns on). Pushing the switch a second time will disable the system (LED turns off).

The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off automatically for any of the following conditions:

• Parking maneuver is completed
• Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when searching for a parking space
• Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance into the parking space
• Steering wheel is touched during active steering guidance into the parking space
• ParkSense Park Assist switch is pushed
• Driver's door is opened
• Rear liftgate is opened
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking System intervention

• 4WD Low is active or activated
- SAND mode (if equipped) is active or activated
● MUD mode (if equipped) is active or activated
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system allows a maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within the maximum amount of shifts, the system will cancel and the instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only operate and search for a parking space when the following conditions are present:
- Gear selector is in DRIVE
- Ignition is in the RUN position
- ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated

• Driver's door is closed
• Rear liftgate is closed
  ● Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h)

NOTE:

If the vehicle is driven above approximately 15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The driver must then reactivate the system by pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.

- The outer surface and the underside of the front and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction.

When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED will turn off if any of the above conditions are not present.

PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING SPACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION

When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled, the "Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK to Switch to Perpendicular" message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Push the OK button on the left side of the steering wheel to change your parking space setting to a perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to parallel parking if you desire.

Switch To Perpendicular

Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking maneuver, the "Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK to switch to Parallel" message will appear in the instrument cluster display.

NOTE:

- When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated.

• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking a parking space, the driver should drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The system will only indicate the last detected parking space (example: if passing multiple available parking spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected parking space for the maneuver).

When an available parking space has been found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular or parallel parking sequence (depending on the type of maneuver being performed).

Space Found – Keep Moving Forward

Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to stop the vehicle's movement and remove your hands from the steering wheel. When the vehicle comes to a standstill (your hands still removed from the steering wheel), you will be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position.

The system may then instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete before then instructing to check the vehicle's surroundings, and move backward.

Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space

Several more gear shifts (DRIVE and REVERSE) while keeping hands off of the steering wheel will be instructed to the driver while checking the vehicle's surroundings before completing the parking maneuver.

When the vehicle is in the parking position, the maneuver is complete and the driver will be instructed to check the vehicle's parking position, then shift the vehicle into PARK. The message "Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position" will be displayed momentarily.

NOTE:

• It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
• It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.

• When the system instructs the driver to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.

• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the system will cancel and the instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.

• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance into the parking space. The system will provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up and moving forward. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system.

LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED

LANESENSE OPERATION

The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect lane markings and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries.

When both lane markings are detected and the driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If the driver continues to drift out of the lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.

The driver may manually override the haptic warning by applying force to the steering wheel at any time.

When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides visual warnings through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic or a torque warning will not be provided.

NOTE:

When operating conditions have been met, the LaneSense system will monitor if the driver's hands are on the steering wheel and provide an audible warning to the driver if removed.

The system will cancel if the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.

TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF

The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.

To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense button (LED turns off). A

"LaneSense On" message is shown in the instrument cluster display.

To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense button once (LED turns on).

NOTE:

The LaneSense system will retain the last system state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.

LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE

The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift condition through the instrument cluster display.

When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the LaneSense telltale solid white.

System On With Gray Lines/White Telltale

Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected

- When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if a lane departure occurs.

148 STARTING AND OPERATING

- When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the LaneSense telltale changes from solid white to flashing yellow.

NOTE:

The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the right lane marking has been detected.

Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected

- When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale | solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is on to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.

- When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left lane line turns solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.

For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.

- When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left lane line flashes yellow (on/off). The LaneSense telltale changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.

For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.

NOTE:

The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for a right lane departure.

CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS

The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect system ➤ page 174.

NOTE:

• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
• The warnings are disabled with the use of the turn signal.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision Warning, etc.).

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA

The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along with a caution note to

"Check Entire Surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate.

Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera

1. Press the "Controls" button located on the bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the "Backup Camera" button to turn the Rear View Camera system on.

NOTE:

The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect system page 174.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the previous screen appears. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the following conditions occur: The vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, the vehicle's ignition is placed in the

OFF position, or the user presses image defeat "X" to exit out of the camera video display.

When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:

Zone	Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red	0 - 1 ft(0 - 30 cm)
Yellow	1 ft - 6.5 ft(30 cm - 2 m)
Green	6.5 ft or greater(2 m or greater)

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.

NOTE:

If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

Rear View Camera — Viewing At Speed

When the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE the Rear View Camera can be activated with the "Backup Camera" button in the

Controls menu. This feature allows the customer to monitor the area directly behind the vehicle (or trailer, if equipped) for up to 10 seconds while driving. If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be displayed continuously until deactivated via the "X" button on the touchscreen.

REFUELING THE VEHICLE

1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located under the headlamp switch).

Fuel Filler Door Release Switch

1. Open the fuel filler door.

Fuel Filler

NOTE:

• In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.

• There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the pipe seal the system.

• Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the nozzle opens and holds the flapper doors while refueling.

• Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
• Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
• Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.

WARNING!

- Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the "Malfunction Indicator Light" to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling.

CAUTION!

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not "top off" the fuel tank after filling.

EMERGENCY FUEL FILLER DOOR RELEASE

If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel filler door emergency release.

1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin to the center, this will pop up the outboard edge.

152 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to disengage snaps.
2. Remove the storage bin.
3. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door, push the release cable back to the home position to re-seat the fuel door latch to the closed position.

Release Cable

NOTE:

If the fuel door does not latch after the use of the manual release cable, the actuator latch should be manually returned to the closed position.

VEHICLE LOADING

CERTIFICATION LABEL

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.

This label contains the month and year of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear GAWR. Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added.

Loading

The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to ensure that the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.

To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR page 152.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition.

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

WARNING!

If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg) or more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR → page 152.

WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

Tongue Weight (TW)

The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

Trailer Frontal Area

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.

If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.

Weight-Carrying Hitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers.

Weight-Distributing Hitch

A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in

accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR requirements.

WARNING!

• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.

Recommended Distribution Hitch Adjustment

1. Verify that the vehicle is at the normal ride height.

NOTE:

The vehicle must remain in the engine run position with all doors closed while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of the air suspension system.

1. Position the vehicle to be ready to connect to the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
2. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspension, using the touchscreen radio settings, enable tire jack mode. Tire jack mode will be canceled and procedure must be restarted if the vehicle is driven at speeds above 5mph (8 km/h).
3. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender to ground; this is height H1.

A0636000084US

Measuring Height (H)

1. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight distribution bars connected.
2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender to ground; this is height H2.
3. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars per the manufacturers' recommendations so that the height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1 above normal ride height [H1]).

156 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. Use the touchscreen radio settings and switch off tire jack mode. Make sure the truck returns to normal ride height. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and weight distributing hitch to confirm the manufacturers' recommendations have been met.

2. The vehicle can now be driven.

Measurement Example	Example Height (mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/2 10.5
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 935.5

NOTE:

For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with tow haul mode engaged (if equipped).

TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty	10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
For the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain see ➔ page 157.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain:

Engine Frontal Area		Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)	Max. Trailer Tongue Wt. (See Note)
3.6L - 4x2 (Std Cooling) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq	m) 3,500 lb (1,587 kg) 350 lb	(158 kg)
3.6L - 4x4 (Std Cooling) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq	m) 3,500 lb (1,587 kg) 350 lb	(158 kg)
3.6L - 4x2 (HD Cooling) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq	m) 6,200 lb (2,812 kg) 620 lb	(281 kg)
3.6L - 4x4 (HD Cooling) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq	m) 6,200 lb (2,812 kg) 620 lb	(281 kg)
5.7L - 4x4 (Std Cooling) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq	m) 5,000 lb (2,267 kg) 500 lb	(226 kg)
5.7L - 4x4 (HD Cooling) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq	m) 7,200 lb (3,265 kg) 720 lb	(326 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE:

The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard ↩ page 377.

The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and GTW.

TRAILER HITCH RECEIVER COVER REMOVAL — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to access the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped). This hitch receiver cover is located at the bottom center of the rear fascia.

1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of the hitch receiver cover a quarter turn counterclockwise.

NOTE:

Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the slot of the locking retainer if needed for added leverage.

Hitch Receiver Cover

1 - Hitch Receiver Cover
2 – Locking Retainers

1. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you), pull downwards to disengage the tabs located at the top of the hitch receiver cover.

Hitch Receiver Cover

To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after towing repeat the procedure in reverse order.

NOTE:

Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation.

TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.

Weight Distribution

CAUTION!

Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.

Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The tongue weight of the trailer.
- The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle.
- The weight of the driver and all passengers.

note:

Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle → page 383.

TOWING REQUIREMENTS

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended.

CAUTION!

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

Perform the maintenance listed in Scheduled Servicing ↕ page 342. When towing a trailer, never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating or Gross Combined Weight Rating.

WARNING!

- Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
  • GCWR must not be exceeded.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded:
  GVWR
  • GTW
  GAWR
• Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.

Towing Requirements — Tires

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
• Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing while using a full size spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer.

• Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
• For further information ↩ page 377.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).

WARNING!

• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.

NOTE:

Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle's wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.

NOTE:

• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle before launching a boat (or any other device plugged into vehicle's electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.

M0636000043US

Four-Pin Connector

1 - Ground
2 - Park
3 – Left Stop/Turn
4 - Right Stop/Turn

Seven-Pin Connector

1 - Battery
2 - Backup Lamps
3 - Right Stop/Turn
4 - Electric Brakes
5 - Ground
6 - Left Stop/Turn
7 – Running Lamps

TOWING TIPS

Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.

Automatic Transmission

Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW mode (if equipped), or use the AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear.

NOTE:

Using TOW mode (if equipped), or selecting a lower gear (using the AutoStick shift control) while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also provide better engine braking.

AutoStick

• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose "5" if the desired speed can be maintained. Choose "4" or "3" if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow.

Cruise Control — If Equipped

• Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the Cruise Control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE

Towing Condition Wheels	OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models	Four-Wheel Drive Models Without 4WD LOW	Four-Wheel Drive Models With 4WD LOW
Flat Tow NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED			See Instructions• Transmission in PARK• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)• Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow	Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
	Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer	ALL	OK OK OK

NOTE:

- When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.

• A flat tow electric power steering enable kit is available for increased flat tow performance, contact an authorized dealer for further details.
• Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be placed in Transport Mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck → page 115. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example,

engine will not run), tie-downs should be fastened over the tires using specific straps (not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.

RECREATIONAL TOWING — TWO WHEEL DRIVE MODELS

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.

Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:

1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.

NOTE:

If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.

1. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.

4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.

5. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.

CAUTION!

Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

RECREATIONAL TOWING — QUADRA-TRAC I (SINGLE-SPEED TRANSFER CASE) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS

Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case.

NOTE:

This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

RECREATIONAL TOWING — QUADRA-TRAC II/QUADRA-DRIVE II FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS

The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission must be in PARK (P) for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL selection button is adjacent to the transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL can take place with the selector switch in any mode position.

CAUTION!

- DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case.
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure outlined under "Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)" to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.

Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.

CAUTION!

It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing:

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground, with the engine running.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.

NOTE:

• Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.

166 STARTING AND OPERATING

- If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspension, the engine should be started and left running for a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at least once every 24 hours. This process allows the air suspension to adjust the vehicle's ride height to compensate for temperature effects.

1. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The light behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A "FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL" message will appear in the instrument cluster.

NEUTRAL (N) Button

1. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
2. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE.
3. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the transmission back into NEUTRAL.

5. Firmly apply the parking brake.

6. With the transmission and transfer case in NEUTRAL, push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until the engine turns off.

7. Place the transmission gear selector in PARK. Release the brake pedal.
8. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice (without pressing the brake pedal), to turn the ignition to the off mode.
9. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar.
10. Release the parking brake.

Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage:

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.

NOTE:

• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.

• Press and hold the brake pedal.

• Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

• Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for one second.

NEUTRAL (N) Switch

1. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the engine off.
3. Release the brake pedal.

4. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.

5. Start the engine.

6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Release the parking brake.
8. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE, release the brake pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.

DRIVING TIPS

ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than conventional passenger cars.

An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

NOTE:

Prior to off-road driving with non-Summit models that are also equipped with an Off-Road Package, remove the lower fascia to prevent damage. The lower fascia is attached to the lower part of the front fascia with seven quarter turn fasteners and can be removed by hand. The front license plate bracket must be removed first (if equipped).

1 - Front Bumper
2 - Front Air Dam Fasteners

NOTE:

On Summit models the lower front fascia is not removable.

Lower Front Fascia Removal:

1. Remove the seven quarter turn fasteners.

2. Starting on one side of the vehicle, disengage lower fascia from the upper fascia. Grab the portion inside the wheel well. Pulling it downwards and toward you, separate the tabs from the slots in the upper fascia.

3. Continue working your way across the vehicle, separating the remaining tabs from the slots in the upper fascia.

NOTE:

Do not allow the lower fascia to freely hang from the tabs in the opposite corner as damage to lower and upper fascia may result.

1. Store the lower fascia in a safe location.

NOTE:

It is recommend to also remove the radar sensor on vehicle equipped to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). This radar sensor is specifically calibrated to your vehicle and is not interchangeable with other radar sensors.

Radar Sensor Removal Procedure (If Equipped With Adaptive Cruise Control [ACC]):

1. With the lower fascia removed, which provides access to the sensor and bracket, disconnect the wiring harness from the sensor.
2. Using a suitable tool, disconnect the wire clip from the bracket.

NOTE:

Before the next step, it is recommended to scribe location to assist in reinstallation.

1. Using a suitable tool, remove the two fasteners that hold the sensor bracket to the bumper beam.

2. Locate the protective connector on the rear of the bumper beam.

Bumper Beam

1 – Inside Bumper Beam
2 - Protective Connector Location
3 - Sensor Bracket Fasteners
4 - Sensor Bracket

NOTE:

Only models with the Off-Road Package are equipped with the a protective connector.

1. Remove the plug from the protective connector and install on the sensor.

2. Insert the wiring harness connector into the protective connector.

3. Store sensor and bracket in a safe place.

NOTE:

All Speed Control functions will be disabled when the radar sensor is disconnected.

Radar Sensor Installation Procedure (If Equipped With Adaptive Cruise Control [ACC]):

1. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the protective connector on the bumper beam.
2. Remove plug from radar sensor and install in protective connector.
3. Using the previously scribed marks, reinstall the radar sensor and bracket using the two fasteners.

NOTE:

Some alignment may be required upon fascia installation to align sensor with fascia.
4. Install the wiring harness connector into the radar sensor.

NOTE:

If you receive a fault, see an authorized dealer they may need to perform a sensor alignment.

Lower Front Fascia Installation

NOTE:

This will only work if you have a helper.

1. Starting at the center of the vehicle, engage a sufficient number of tabs to support the weight of the lower fascia (typically one or two tabs) into the upper fascia.
2. Working your way outward, engage the tabs into the slots on one side of the vehicle.
3. Return to the center of the vehicle and repeat Step 2 to the opposite side of the vehicle.

NOTE:

• It may be necessary to apply additional force to individual tabs to make sure they are fully engaged.

• Do not use any tools to apply additional force to the tabs as damage to the upper and lower fascias may result.

• Reinstall the seven quarter turn fasteners.

Quadra-Lift — If Equipped

When off-roading, it is recommended that the lowest useable vehicle height that will clear the current obstacle or terrain be selected. The vehicle height should then be raised as required by the changes in terrain.

The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically change the vehicle to the optimized height based on the Selec-Terrain switch position. The vehicle height can be changed from the default height for each Selec-Terrain mode by normal use of the air suspension switches ➤ page 11

When To Use 4WD LOW Range — If Equipped

When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional traction. This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range.

WARNING!

Do not drive in 4WD LOW Range on dry pavement; driveline damage may result. 4WD-LOW Range locks front and rear drivelines together and does not allow for differential action between the front to rear driveshafts. Driving in 4WD LOW on pavement will cause driveline binding; use only on wet or slippery surfaces.

Driving Through Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water, there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water.

NOTE:

Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to 20 inches (51 cm) of water, while crossing small rivers or streams. To maintain optimal performance of your vehicle's heating and ventilation system it is recommended to switch the system into recirculation mode during water fording.

CAUTION!

When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to determine the depth and the bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave effects.

Flowing Water

If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing water can erode the streambed, causing your vehicle

to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.

Standing Water

Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches (51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects. Maximum speed is 5 mph (8 km/h).

Maintenance

After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle, transfer case) to ensure the fluids have not been contaminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent component damage.

Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand

In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary ↩ page 112. Only shift into a lower gear to maintain forward motion. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.

Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.

Hill Climbing

NOTE:

Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.

Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.

If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine, and shift into REVERSE (R). Back slowly down the hill, allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.

WARNING!

If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.

Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill. Always drive straight up or down.

If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb.

Traction Downhill

When descending mountains or hills, use Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed Control to avoid repeated heavy braking.

If not equipped with Hill Descent Control or Select-Speed Control use the following procedure:

Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction.

When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible.

After Driving Off-Road

Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it.

• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.

- After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.

WARNING!

Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.

- If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation.

MULTIMEDIA

UCONNECT SYSTEMS

For detailed information about your Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement

NOTE:

Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.

CYBERSECURITY

Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly.

Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.

The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.

WARNING!

• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your vehicle's systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately.

174 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:

• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates.

• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:

• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about available Uconnect software updates.

• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).

Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For further information, refer to "Data Collection & Privacy" in your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement or ↗ page 97.

UCONNECT SETTINGS

The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow you to access and change the Customer Programmable Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.

Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings. Push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting.

Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.

Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.

Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.

CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Buttons On Faceplate And Buttons On Touchscreen

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

For the Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display and the Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display

Press the Apps button, then press the Settings button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features.

NOTE:

• All settings should be changed with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
• Only one area of the touchscreen may be selected at a time.

When making a selection, press one button on the touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting option until a check mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings.

NOTE:

Availability of settings, setting names, and menu options can vary depending on vehicle features, equipped Uconnect system, and the currently installed software.

Language

When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will display in the chosen language.

Setting Name Description
Language	This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.

Display

When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The available settings are:

Setting Name Description
Display Mode	This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON	This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”.The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF	This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Keyboard –If Equipped	This setting will change the keyboard type on the display.The selectable keyboards are “ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY Keyboard”.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout	This setting will allow you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster	This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster	This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.

Setting Name Description
SiriusXM Travel Link Weather Alerts — If Equipped	This setting will display SiriusXM Travel Link Weather Alerts on the radio.

Units

When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:

Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom	This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.

Voice

When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle's Voice Recognition feature.

Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length	This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system. The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from the system. The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List	This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.

Clock

When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle's internal clock.

Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS	This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system.The system will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time And Format/Time Format	This setting will allow you set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Time Hours	This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes	This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar – If Equipped	This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Set Date – If Equipped This setting will allow you to set the date.

Camera

When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle's camera features.

Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay	This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines	This setting will turn the Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.

Safety/Assistance

When the Safety/Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle's safety settings. These options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.

Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped	This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped	This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply brake pressure when a collision is detected.
LaneSense Warning – If Equipped	This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength – If Equipped	This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a lane departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
ParkSense	This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and provide either audible chime or a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume – If Equipped	This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume	This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist	This setting will provide braking assist if the Rear ParkSense system senses a collision with an object.
Blind Spot Alert	This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Power Steering Default	This setting will adjust the power steering modes. Setting options are “Normal”, “Sport”, and “Comfort”.
Hill Start Assist – If Equipped This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines – If Equipped	This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.

182 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay — If Equipped	This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped	This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped	This setting will tilt the mirrors when the vehicle is place in REVERSE.

Mirrors & Wipers

When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle's mirrors and wipers.

Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse	This Setting will tilt the mirrors when the vehicle is placed in REVERSE. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Folding Side Mirrors — If Equipped	This setting will automatically fold the side mirrors. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the	Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights with Wipers	This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.

Lights

When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle's exterior and interior lights.

NOTE:

When the "Daytime Running Lights" feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchased.

Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay	This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach	This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights	This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock	This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.

Doors & Locks

When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle's doors.

Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks	This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit	This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock	This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Sound Horn With Lock	This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start	This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks	This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed to open all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors on the first push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry	This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter-N-Go) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob	This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert This setting will allow you to turn the Power Liftgate on or off.

Seats & Comfort

When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle's comfort systems when remote start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.

Setting Name Description

Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start

This setting will activate the vehicle's comfort system and heated seats (if equipped) or heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.

Key Off Options

When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shut off. These settings will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.

Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay	This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay	This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension — If Equipped	This setting will automatically lower the vehicle ride height for easier entry and exit of the vehicle.

Suspension — If Equipped

When the Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle's suspension system.

Setting Name Description
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension	This setting will automatically lower the vehicle ride height for easier entry and exit. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Display Suspension Messages	This setting will display suspension messages within the Instrument Cluster Display. Selectable options are “All” and “Warning Only”.
Tire Jack Mode	This setting will disable the suspension system to prevent auto leveling when the vehicle is on a jack for changing a tire and while setting up trailer weight distribution bars. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Transport Mode	This setting will disable the suspension system for when the vehicle is being flat towed. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Wheel Alignment Mode	This setting will disable the suspension system for when the vehicle is having wheel alignment service. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.

Audio

When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle's sound system. These settings can change the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.

Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade	This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer	This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume	This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up.The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.

188 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Description
AUX Volume Offset	This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play	This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness – If Equipped This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.

Phone/Bluetooth®

When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.

Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster	This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb	This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The following settings are “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones – If Equipped This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources – If Equipped This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices	This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
Projection Manager This setting will access Projection Manager options.

SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped

NOTE:

A subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio is required for these settings to be functional.

When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. These settings can be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.

Setting Name Description
Tune Start	This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip	This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information	This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.

Accessibility — If Equipped

When pressing the Accessibility button of the touchscreen, the system will display the option related to the vehicle's theater system.

Setting Name Description
Video Button Readback	This setting will announce a function prior to performing the action selected when using DVD/Blu-rayTM functions. For example, when activated, and the Play button is selected, the system will announce “Play Button Selected”, and then once pressed again, the Play button will perform its action.

Restore Settings

When the Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.

Setting Name Description
Restore Settings	This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory default.
Reset App Drawer This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data	This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.

System Information — If Equipped

When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.

Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.

UCONNECT INTRODUCTION

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display

1 - Radio Button
2 - Media Button
3 – Climate Button
4 - Apps Button
5 — Controls Button
6 - Phone Button
7 – Settings Button

NOTE:

Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.

Feature Description
Radio/Media	Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources ➔ page 194.
Phone	Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free phone system ➔ page 207.
Settings	Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings ➔ page 174.
	Push the Enter/Browse button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted selection on the screen. Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a radio station.
	Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
	Push the Mute button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
	Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.NOTE:Push and hold the Volume & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to reset the radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from freezing or being stuck.
Controls — If Equipped	Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated seats and steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Uconnect apps.
Climate	Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate control functions ↩ page 56.

DRAG & DROP MENU BAR

The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily customized for your preference. Simply follow these steps:

Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display Drag & Drop

1. Press the Apps button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app to replace an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.

NOTE:

This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK.

SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION

Safety Guidelines

WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

Please read this manual carefully before using the system. It contains instructions on how to use the system in a safe and effective manner.

Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. Doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.

Please read and follow these safety precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury or property damage.

• Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. If prolonged viewing of the screen is required, park in a safe location and set the parking brake.
• Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to the product. See an authorized dealer for repair.
• Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a level that still allows you to hear outside traffic and emergency vehicles.

Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System

• The Uconnect system is a sophisticated electronic device. Do not let young children use the system.
• Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your music or sound system at loud volumes. Exercise caution when setting the volume on the system.

- Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture away from the system. Besides damage to the system, moisture can cause electric shocks as with any electronic device.

NOTE:

Many features of this system are speed dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the touchscreen features while the vehicle is in motion.

Care And Maintenance

• Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could scratch the surface.
• Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
• If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's precautions and directions ➤ page 414.

UCONNECT MODES

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o'clock positions.

Remote Sound System Controls

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.

Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).

The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode:

Radio Operation

Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for the next available station and pushing the bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next available station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio presets.

Media Mode

Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch goes to the beginning of the current track, or the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play. Double pressing the bottom button switch will skip to the previous track if it is after eight seconds into the current track.

RADIO MODE

Radio Controls

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display

1 – Radio Bands
2 – Preset Radio Stations
3 – View Next Preset Radio Stations
4 - Status Bar
5 — Browse Button
6 – Seek Down
7 - Tune Button
8 – Seek Up ▶▶
9 – Audio Settings
10 - Bottom Bar

The radio is equipped with the following modes:

• AM
• FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)

Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the corresponding buttons in Radio Mode.

Volume & On/Off Control

Push the Volume & On/Off control knob to turn on and off the Uconnect system.

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the Volume & On/Off control knob clockwise increases the volume, and counterclockwise decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

Mute Button

Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the system.

Tune/Scroll Control

Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station frequency. Push the Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.

Seek

The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by pressing the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen to the right and left of the radio station display or by pushing the left steering wheel audio control button up or down.

Seek Up and Seek Down

Press and release the Seek Up ▶or Seek Down ▶button to tune the radio to the next available station or channel. During a Seek Up/Down function, if the radio reaches the starting station after passing through the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station where it began.

Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down

Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up ▶ or Seek Down button to advance the radio through the available stations or channels at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next available station or channel when the button on the touchscreen is released.

NOTE:

Pressing and holding either the Seek Up ▶ or Seek Down ▶ button will scan the different frequency bands at a slower rate.

Direct Tune

Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio station or channel.

Press the available number button on the touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station. Once a number has been entered, any numbers that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be reached) will become deactivated/grayed out.

Undo

You can backspace an entry by pressing the Back button on the touchscreen.

GO

Once the last digit of a station has been entered, press "GO". The Direct Tune screen will close, and the system will automatically tune to that station.

Radio Voice Commands

Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)

Push the VR button on the steering wheel and wait for the beep to say a command. See an example below:

- "Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM"

- “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”

Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say "Help". The system provides you with a list of commands.

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If Equipped

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content. SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.

Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner's Manual kit for more information.

SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold separately after the trial included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

All fees and programming subject to change. SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous US and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio service is available throughout their satellite service area and in AK. © 2020 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.

This functionality is only available for radios equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky.

If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might have to change the vehicle's position in order to receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal in underground parking garages or tunnels.

No Subscription

Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the Radio does not have the necessary subscription, the Radio is able to receive the Preview channel only.

198 MULTIMEDIA

Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription

To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription, US residents visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or call: 1-800-643-2112

Canadian residents visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or call: 1-888-539-7474.

NOTE:

You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID) located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.

The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the SXM button on the touchscreen.

When in Satellite Mode:

• The SXM button on the touchscreen is highlighted.
• The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top of the screen.
• The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in the center.
• The Program Information is displayed at the bottom of the Channel Number.
• The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed below the Program Information.

Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.

In addition to the tuning operation functions common to all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/Weather button, and Favorite button functions are available in SiriusXM® Mode.

Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio

1-Browse
2-Replay
3 – Seek Down Button ◀◀
4 – Direct Tune Button
5 - Seek Up Button ▶▶
6 – Audio Settings Button

Replay

The replay function provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay memory is lost.

Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The play/pause, rewind/forward and live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time.

You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.

Play/Pause		Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing of live or rewound content at any time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button again on the touchscreen.
Rewind		Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is released.
Forward		Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be done when the content is previously rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live content. A continuous press of the Forward button on the touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is release.
Live Live		Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the playing of live content.

Favorites

Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to activate the favorites menu, which will time out within 20 seconds in absence of user interaction.

You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X button.

The favorites feature enables you to set a favorite artist or song that is currently playing. The radio then uses this information to alert you when either the favorite artist or song is being played at any time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels.

The maximum number of favorites that can be stored in the Radio is 50.

Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist button on the touchscreen.

Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a favorite song, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and then the Favorite Song button on the touchscreen.

Browse In SXM

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button

1 - All Button
2 – Presets Button
3 - Favorites Button
4 - Game Zone Button

Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump settings, along with providing the SiriusXM® Channel List.

This Screen contains many submenus. You can exit submenus to return to a parent menu by pressing the Back arrow.

All

Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When pressing the All button, the following categories become available:

• Channel List Press the Channel List to display all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and Down arrows, located on the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the Tune/Scroll knob.
• Genre List Press the Genre button on the touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You can select any desired Genre by pressing the Genre List. The radio tunes to a channel with the content in the selected Genre.

Presets — If Equipped

Press the Presets button (if equipped) located at the left of the Browse screen.

You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up and Down arrows located at the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the Tune/Scroll knob as well.

Preset Selection

A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the Radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset.

Deleting A Preset

A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding preset.

Favorites

Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.

The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings, along with providing a list of Channels currently airing any of the items in the Favorites list.

You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up and Down arrows located at the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the Tune/Scroll knob as well.

Remove Favorites

Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the screen. Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be deleted.

Alert Settings

Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from a visual alert or audible and visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.

Game Zone

Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of the Browse screen. This feature provides you with the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and set alerts.

On-Air

Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently airing any of the items in the Selections list, and pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio to that channel.

Select Team — If Equipped

Press the Select Team button on the touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all teams within the league will appear, then you can select a team by pressing the corresponding box. A check mark appears for all teams that are chosen.

Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon

Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the screen. Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete all of the selections or press the Trash Can icon next to the selection to be deleted.

Alert Settings

Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from "Alert me to on-air games upon start" or "Alert upon score update" or both when one or more of your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.

Tune Start

Tune Start begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song.

Setting Presets

Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display Radio Presets

The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are activated by pressing any of the Preset buttons, located at the top of the screen.

When you are on a station that you wish to save as a preset, press and hold the numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds.

The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio Modes.

A total of six presets will appear on the screen. You can switch between the radio presets list by pressing the Arrow button located in the upper right of the radio touchscreen.

Preset Features — If Equipped

Browse In AM/FM

When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen provides a means to edit the Presets List and is entered by pushing the Enter/Browse button.

Scrolling Preset List

Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can scroll the preset list by rotation of the Tune/Scroll knob or by pressing the Up and Down Arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.

Preset Selection From List

A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the currently highlighted Preset.

When selected, the radio tunes to the station stored in the Presets.

Deleting Presets

A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding preset.

Return To Main Radio Screen

You can return to the Main Radio Screen by pressing the X button or the Back Arrow button when in the Browse Presets screen.

Audio Settings

Press the Audio button within the settings main menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.

The audio settings can also be accessed on the Radio Mode screen by pressing the Audio button. You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the X button.

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display

1 – Balance/Fade
2 - Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 – Surround Sound
5 – Loudness
6 - AUX Volume Offset
7 – Radio Off With Door

Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade	Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer	Press the + or - buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume	The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound - If Equipped	When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness - If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset	The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and - buttons. This alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play - If Equipped	The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is connected to one of the vehicle's Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press “Off” to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door - If Equipped	The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay selected time has expired.

MEDIA MODE

Operating Media Mode

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode

1 - Repeat
2 – Select Source
3 - Track Time
4 - Shuffle
5 - Info
6 - Bluetooth®
7 - Tracks

Audio Source Selection

Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source Select button on the touchscreen and

the desired mode button on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the Media sources available. When available, you can select the Browse button on the touchscreen to be given these options:

• Now Playing
• Artists
• Albums
• Genres
• Songs
• Playlists
• Folders

You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Info button on the touchscreen for artist information on the current song playing.

Types of Media Modes

USB Mode

Overview

USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB device into the USB port, or by selecting the USB button on the left side of the touchscreen, or the

Source Select/Select Source button and then selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped).

Bluetooth® Mode

Overview

Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device, containing music, to the Uconnect system.

Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the Uconnect system.

To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth® button on the left side of the touchscreen or under the Source Select/Select Source button (if equipped).

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source

AUX Mode

Overview

Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX button on the left side of the touchscreen, or under the Source Select button (if equipped).

To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode and begin to play.

Controlling The Auxiliary Device

The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be provided by the radio; use the device controls instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume button, Volume/Mute rotary knob, or the On/Off rotary knob, or with the volume of the attached device.

NOTE:

The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music on the device.

Seek Up/Seek Down

In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the USB device. Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current selection, or to return to the beginning of the previous selection if the USB device is within the first three seconds of the current selection.

In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device is within the first second of the current selection.

Browse

In USB Modes, press the Browse button on the touchscreen to display the browse window. In USB Mode, the left side of the browse window displays a list of ways you can browse through the contents of the USB device. If supported by the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist, Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired button on the touchscreen on the left side of the screen. The center of the browse window shows items and its sub-functions, which can be scrolled through by pressing the Up and Down buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob can also be used to scroll.

Media Mode

In USB Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source: USB.

In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source: Bluetooth®.

In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source: AUX.

Repeat

In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat button on the touchscreen is highlighted when active. The Radio will continue to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button again to enter Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as long

as the repeat function is active. To cancel Repeat, press the Repeat button a third time.

Shuffle

In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to play the selections on the USB device in random order to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.

Audio

Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the Audio button ↩ page 195.

Info

In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Info button on the touchscreen to display the current track information. Press the Info or X button on the touchscreen a second time to cancel this feature.

Tracks

In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List. The song currently playing is indicated by an arrow and lines above and below the song title. When in the Tracks List screen you can rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to highlight a track (indicated by the line above and below the track name) and then push the Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track.

In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device supports this feature, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List. The currently playing song is indicated by a red arrow and lines above and below the song title.

Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.

Media Voice Commands

Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®, and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only available for connected USB and AUX devices.

Push the VR button located on the steering wheel. After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.

• "Change source to Bluetooth®"
• "Change source to AUX"
• "Change source to USB"

- "Play artist Beethoven"; "Play album Greatest Hits"; "Play song Moonlight Sonata"; "Play genre Classical"

Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre information is displayed.

PHONE MODE

Overview

Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone.

The feature supports the following:

Voice Activated Features

• Hands-Free dialing via Voice ("Call John Smith Mobile" or "Dial 248-555-1212").
• Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your incoming SMS messages.
• Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward one of 18 predefined SMS messages to incoming calls/text messages.

208 MULTIMEDIA

• Redialing last dialed numbers ("Redial").
• Calling Back the last incoming call number ("Call Back").
• Viewing call logs on screen ("Show Incoming Calls," "Show Outgoing Calls," "Show Missed Calls," or "Show Recent Calls").
• Searching Contacts phone number ("Search for John Smith Mobile").

Screen Activated Features

• Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks displayed on the touchscreen.
• Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
• Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Messages.
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly.

NOTE:

Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.

Your mobile phone's audio is transmitted through your vehicle's audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone.

For Uconnect customer support:

• US visit UconnectPhone.com or call 877-855-8400
• Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call 800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call 800-387-9983

Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone for private conversation.

WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

The Phone feature is driven through your Bluetooth® "Hands-Free Profile" mobile phone. Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station. Ensure you phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to the Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio devices are allowed to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time.

Phone Button

The Phone button on your steering wheel is used to get into the Phone Mode and make calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls, view phonebook, etc. When you push the button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal to give a command.

Voice Command Button

The Voice Command button "on your steering wheel is only used for "barge in" and when you are already in a call or want to make another call.

The button on your steering wheel is also used to access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command features if your vehicle is equipped.

Phone Operation

Operation

Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu structure. Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two general methods for how Voice Command works:

1. Say compound commands like "Call John Smith mobile".

2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task.

You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options.

- Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the beep, which follows the "Listen" prompt or another prompt.

- For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying "Call" and then "John Smith" and then "mobile", the following compound command can be said: "Call John Smith mobile."

- For each feature explanation in this section, only the compound command form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it. For example, you can use the compound command form voice command "Search for John Smith," or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands: "Search Contacts" and when asked, "John Smith." Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if

speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.

Natural Speech

Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.

Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out certain non-word utterances and sounds such as "ah" and "eh." The system handles fill-in words such as "I would like to".

The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as "make a phone call" and "to Kelly Smith". For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow-up prompt such as "Who do you want to call?" in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized.

The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the system requires more information from the user, it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pushing the Voice Command button on the steering wheel.

210 MULTIMEDIA

Help Command

If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at any prompt, say "Help" following the beep.

To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel and say a command or say "Help". All Phone sessions begin with a push of the VR button or the Phone button.

Cancel Command

At any prompt, after the beep, you can say "Cancel" and you will be returned to the main menu.

You can also push the VR button or Phone button on your steering wheel when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu.

Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone

Use this QR code to access your digital experience.

To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a cellular phone and the Uconnect system.

To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone's manual. Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone compatibility information.

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display

NOTE:

• You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.

Follow the steps below to pair your phone:

1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
2. Press the Phone button.

NOTE:

• If there are no phones currently connected with the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you would like to pair a mobile phone.

• This pop-up only appears when the user enters Phone Mode and no other device(s) have previously been paired. If the system has a phone previously paired, even if no phone is currently connected with the system, this pop-up will not appear.

• Select "Yes" to begin the pairing process.

• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.

• Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.

• Select "Bluetooth®" and ensure it is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to search for Bluetooth® connections.

NOTE:

During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the PIN from the pop-up on your mobile phone.

1. If "No" is selected and you still would like to pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or Settings button from the Uconnect Phone main screen.

2. Press the Paired Phones button or the Add Device button.

3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see below). When prompted on the phone, select "Uconnect" and accept the connection request.

4. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress screen while the system is connecting.

5. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select "Uconnect."

6. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the connection request from Uconnect.

7. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting "Yes" will make this phone the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth® audio device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If "No" is selected, simply select "Uconnect" from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.

NOTE:

For phones which are not made a favorite, the phone priority is determined by the order in which it was paired. The most recent phone paired will have the higher priority.

NOTE:

During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect system to access your "messages" and "contacts". Selecting "Ok" or "Allow" will sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.

You can also use the following VR command to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:

• "Show Paired Phones"

NOTE:

Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect system may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection. If this happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone's Bluetooth® settings.

Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device

1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the source to "Bluetooth®".
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen to display the Paired Audio Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.

212 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:

If there is no device currently connected with the system, a pop-up will appear.

1. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When prompted on the device, confirm the PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
2. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process screen while the system is connecting.
3. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device. Selecting "Yes" will make this device the highest priority. This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range.

NOTE:

For devices which are not made a favorite, the device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired. The most recent device paired will have the higher priority.

You can also use a following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices:

• "Show Paired Phones"

Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing

Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired p55555hone and/or Audio Device within range. If you need to choose a particular phone or audio device follow these steps:

1. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources buttons.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the particular audio device. A pop-up menu will appear; press "Connect Phone".
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.

Disconnecting or Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device

Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display

1 – Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone
2 - Make Favorite
3 – Delete Device/Phone

1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings button.

2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources buttons.

3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the device name for a different phone or audio device than the currently connected device or press the preferred Connected Phone from the list.

4. The option's pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.

Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite

1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources screen, press the Settings button located to the right of the device name for a different phone or audio device than the currently connected device or press the preferred "Connected Phone" from the list.
2. The option's pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen; you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.

Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped

If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has the ability to download contact names and number entries from the mobile phone's phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook Access Profile may support this feature. Your mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect system to access your messages and contacts. Selecting "Ok" or "Allow" will sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.

See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.

• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook, follow the procedure in the "Voice Command" in this section.

• Automatic download and update of a phonebook, if supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you start the vehicle.

• A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four numbers per contact will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone.

• Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is available for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection.

214 MULTIMEDIA

Managing Your Favorites — If Equipped

There are two ways you can add an entry to your favorites:

1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select "Contacts" from the Phone main screen, and then select the appropriate number. Press the Down Arrow icon button or the Settings Gear icon button next to the selected number to display the option's pop-up. In the pop-up, select "Add to Favorites".

NOTE:

If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to remove an existing favorite.

To Remove A Favorite — If Equipped

1. To remove a Favorite, select "Favorites" from the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon button or the Settings Gear icon button next to the contact you want to remove from your

favorites. This will bring up the options for that Favorite contact.

1. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.

Phone Call Features

The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have.

Listed below are the phone options with Uconnect:

• Redial
  • Dial by pressing in the number
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
• Favorites
• Mobile Phonebook
• Recent Call Log

- SMS Message Viewer

Call Controls

The touchscreen allows you to control the following call features:

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display

1 - Answer
2-End
3 - Mute/Unmute
4 - Transfer
5 – Join Calls

Other phone call features include:

• End Call
• Hold/Unhold/Resume
• Swap two active calls

Key Pad Number Entry

1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to enter the number and press "Dial/Call".

Recent Calls — If Equipped

You may browse a list of the most recent of each of the following call types:

• All Calls
• Incoming Calls or Calls Received
• Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
• Missed Calls

These can be accessed by pressing the Recent Calls button on the phone main screen.

You can also push the VR button on your steering wheel and perform the above operation. For example, say "Show my incoming calls".

Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call Currently In Progress

When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system. Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, press the Answer button on the touchscreen.

You can also press the Caller ID box to place the current call on hold or answer the incoming call.

Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display

1 - Answer Button
2 - Caller ID Box

Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call Currently In Progress

If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone. Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.

NOTE:

Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect system in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.

Do Not Disturb

With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while Do Not Disturb is active.

216 MULTIMEDIA

Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call, or both when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail.

Automatic reply messages can be:

• "I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly".
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.

NOTE:

Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the touchscreen while typing a custom message.

While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls.

NOTE:

• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones®.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that support Bluetooth® Message Access Profile (MAP).

Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold

During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold button on the Phone main screen.

Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress

You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the keypad (if supported by your mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks.

Toggling Between Calls

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display

If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the Swap Calls button on the phone main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.

You can also push the Phone button to toggle between the active and held phone call.

Join Calls

When two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a conference call.

Call Termination

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.

Redial

Push the VR button and after the "Listening" prompt and the following beep, say "Redial."

The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone.

Call Continuation

Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been switched to OFF.

NOTE:

The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to press the Transfer button on the touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.

Advanced Phone Connectivity

Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone

The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen.

Things You Should Know About Uconnect Phone

Voice Command

For the best performance:

• Always wait for the beep before speaking
- Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you
- Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period
- Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
- Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
- Low Road Noise
- Smooth Road Surface
- Fully Closed Windows
• Dry Weather Conditions

WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

Even though the system is designed for many languages and accents, the system may not always work for some.

NOTE:

It is recommended that you do not store names in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.

Number and name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say "O" (letter "O") for "O" (zero).

Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported.

218 MULTIMEDIA

Audio Performance

Audio quality is maximized under:

• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
  ● Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
• Low Road Noise
• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows
  • Dry Weather Conditions
  • Operation From The Driver's Seat

Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.

Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.

Phone Voice Commands

Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.

Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to say a command. See some examples below:

• "Call John Smith"
  • "Dial 123 456 7890"
• "Redial" (call previous outgoing phone number)
• "Call back" (call previously answered incoming phone number)

Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say "Call", then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phonebook. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say "Call John Smith work".

Voice Text Reply — If Equipped

Uconnect can announce incoming text messages. Push the VR button or Phone button and say:

1. "Listen" to have the system read an incoming text message. (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)

2. "Reply" after an incoming text message has been read.

Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the predefined messages and follow the system prompts.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.	Stuck in traffic.	See you later.
No.	Start without me.	I'll be late.
Okay.	Where are you?	I will be 5 < or 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 60>minutes late.
Call me.	Are you there yet?
I'll call you later.	I need directions.	See you in 5 < or 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 60>minutes.
I'm on my way.	Can't talk right now.
I'm lost. Thanks.

NOTE:

Only use the numbering listed in the provided table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose the message.

Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.

Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. For further information on how to enable this feature on your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone's® "User Manual".

Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.

Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped

When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and responds back to confirm your requests. The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.

To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages, and many other useful requests.

Bluetooth® Communication Link

Mobile phones may lose connection to the Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.

Power-Up

After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system ↩ page 414.

ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF EQUIPPED

ANDROID AUTO™

Use this QR code to access your digital experience.

Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect system, and your Android™ 5.0 or higher powered smartphone with a data plan, that allows you to project your small number of its apps onto the touch screen display. Android Auto™ brings your information, and organizes it into that appear just when they are not. Auto™ can be used with speech steering wheel controls, the knob on your radio faceplate, and the touchscreen to control many of your use. To use Android Auto™, perform the procedure:

NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™ features may or may not be available in every region and/or language.

220 MULTIMEDIA

1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the Google Play store on your Android™-powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered smartphone to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle. If the Android Auto™ app was not downloaded, the first time you plug your device in the app begins to download. Your vehicle should be in PARK the first time you use the app.

NOTE:

Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.

Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage

NOTE:

To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may use cellular data and your cellular coverage is shown in the upper right corner of the radio screen. Data plan rates apply.

1. Once the device is connected and recognized, the Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to the Android Auto™ icon.

NOTE:

Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately once a compatible device is connected. You can also launch it by pressing the Android Auto™ icon on the touchscreen.

Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your Uconnect system, the following features can be utilized using your smartphone's data plan:

• Google Maps™ for navigation
- Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for music
- Hands-free calling and texting for communication
- Various compatible apps

Maps

Push and hold the Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel until the beep or tap the Microphone icon to ask Google to take you to a

desired destination by voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access other navigation apps.

While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™ provides voice-guided:

• Navigation
  • Live traffic information
• Lane guidance

For further information, refer to www.android.com/auto/ (US) or https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/ (Canada).

For further information on the navigation function, please refer to https://support.google.com/android or https://support.google.com/androidauto/.

Music

Android Auto™ allows you to access, stream, and play your favorite music with apps like Google Play Music, iHeartRadio, Spotify, and any audio playable application. Using your smartphone's data plan, you can stream endless music on the road.

NOTE:

Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up on your smartphone prior to using Android Auto™ for them to work with Android Auto™.

NOTE:

To see the track details for the music playing through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect system's media screen.

For further information, refer to https://support.google.com/androidauto.

Communication

With Android Auto™ connected, push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to activate voice recognition specific to Android Auto™. This allows you to send and reply to text messages, have incoming text messages read out loud, and place and receive hands-free calls.

Apps

The Android Auto™ App displays all the compatible apps that are available to use with Android Auto™, every time it is launched. You must have the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app through your mobile device for it to work with Android Auto™.

Refer to https://play.google.com/store/apps/ to see the latest list of available apps for Android Auto™.

Android Auto™ Voice Command

NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™ features may or may not be available in every region and/or language.

Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to interact with Android's™ best-in-class speech technology through your vehicle's voice recognition system, and use your smartphone's data plan to project your Android™-powered smartphone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™ 5.0 or higher to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces your "Phone" icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the "Microphone" icon within Android Auto™, to activate Android's™ VR, which recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your smartphone's features:

• Maps
  Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
  • Additional Apps

NOTE:

Requires compatible smartphone running Android™ 5.0 or higher and download app on Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™, and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.

APPLE CARPLAY®

Use this QR code to access your digital experience.

Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on the road

Use your Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and your voice with Siri to get access to Apple Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.

NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay® features may or may not be available in every region and/or language.

To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for the very first connection only, and then use the following procedure:

1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle.

NOTE:

Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.

1. Once the device is connected and recognized, the Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to the Apple CarPlay® Icon.

NOTE:

Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately. You can also launch it by pressing the Apple CarPlay® icon on the touchscreen.

Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage

NOTE:

To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular data is turned on, and that you are in an area with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the left side of the radio screen. Data plan rates apply.

Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your Uconnect system, the following features can be utilized using your iPhone's® data plan:

• Phone
  Music
• Messages
• Maps

Phone

With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice recognition session. You can also press and hold the Home button within Apple CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls or listen to voicemail as you normally would using Siri on your iPhone®.

NOTE:

Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the steering wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR session, not a Siri session, and it will not function with Apple CarPlay®.

Music

Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all your artists, playlists, and music from iTunes® or any third party application installed on your device. Using your iPhone's® data plan, you can also use select third party audio apps including music, news, sports, podcasts, and more.

Messages

Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice recognition session. Apple CarPlay® allows you to use Siri to send or reply to text messages. Siri can also read incoming text messages, but drivers will not be able to read messages, as everything is done via voice.

Maps

Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel until the beep or tap the Microphone icon to ask Apple® Siri to take you to a desired destination by voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon in Apple CarPlay® to access Apple® Maps.

Apps

The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible apps that are available to use, every time it is launched. You must have the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app through your mobile device for it to work with Apple CarPlay®.

Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/(US) or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/ (Canada) to see the latest list of available apps for Apple CarPlay®.

Apple CarPlay® Voice Command

NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay® features may not be available in every region and/or language.

Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to interact with Siri through your vehicle's voice recognition system, and use your smartphone's data plan to project your iPhone® and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your "Phone" icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands to use a list of your iPhone's® features:

• Phone
• Music
• Messages

224 MULTIMEDIA

• Maps — If Equipped
  • Additional Apps — If Equipped

NOTE:

Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc. iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., registered in the US and other countries. Apple® terms of use and privacy statements apply.

ANDROID AUTO™ AND APPLE CARPLAY® TIPS AND TRICKS

Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic Bluetooth® Pairing

After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® for the first time and undergoing the setup procedure, the smartphone pairs to the Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any setup required every time it is within range, if Bluetooth® is turned on.

NOTE:

Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while Android Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth® connections to function. The connected device is unavailable to other devices when connected using Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®.

Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect System — If Equipped

It is possible to have multiple devices connected to the Uconnect system. For example, if using Android Auto™/Apple CarPlay®, the connected device will be used to place hands-free phone calls or send hands-free text messages. However, another device can also be paired to the Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio source, so the passenger can stream music.

NOTE:

Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be launched from the front and center console USB ports.

CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — IF EQUIPPED

Is MY VEHICLE CONNECTED?

Vehicles with an Assist and an SOS button are connected vehicles. These buttons will be located on either the rearview mirror or overhead console, depending on the vehicle. If these buttons are present in your vehicle, you have a connected radio and can take advantage of the many connected vehicle features.

For further information about the ASSIST and SOS buttons ➤ page 321.

INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES

One of the many benefits of your vehicle's Uconnect system is that you can now take advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected vehicle services. To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first need to activate SiriusXM Guardian™ services.

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

NOTE:

SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection, transmission and use of data from your vehicle page 250.

SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information And Business Hours

SiriusXM Guardian™/Care

• US residents visit: https://www.driveuconnect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html or call 1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents visit: https://www.driveuconnect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call 1-877-324-9091

Uconnect Phone Customer Support

UconnectPhone.com or for US residents call: 1-877-855-8400.

Canadian residents call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or call: 1-800-387-9983 (French).

Business Hours

Central Time

• Monday through Friday – 7:00 am to 10:00 pm
• Saturday - 8:00 am to 9:00 pm

What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?

SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device in the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle, which receives GPS signals and communicates with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center via wireless and landline communications networks. Depending on the type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM Guardian™ services require an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network compatible with your device. SiriusXM Guardian™ is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and Canada.

NOTE:

• Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are dependent upon an operative telematics device, a cellular connection, navigation map data, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or reach emergency support.
• Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.

226 MULTIMEDIA

- Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service delivery are hills, structures, buildings, tunnels, weather, damage to the electrical system or other important parts of your vehicle, network congestion, civil disturbances, actions of third parties or the government, Internet failure, and/or the physical location of your vehicle, such as in an underground parking structure or under a bridge.

Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are available for all models.

SiriusXM Guardian™ provides:

• The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote start your vehicle from virtually anywhere by using the Uconnect App or your computer.
• Send & Go capability with the Uconnect App. Use the Uconnect App to easily search, map and send your locations directly to your Uconnect Navigation.
• The ability to locate your vehicle, when you forget where you parked, using the Vehicle Finder function of the Uconnect App.

Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the easy-to-use Uconnect system and SiriusXM Guardian™ services.

The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your Rearview Mirror Or Overhead Console

The ASSIST Button is used for contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care. The SOS Call button connects you directly to SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for assistance in an emergency.

Activation

To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian™ services.

1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
3. For customers in the United States, select "Customer Care" to speak with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent who will activate services in your vehicle, or select "Enter Email" to activate on the web.

For customers in Canada, enter your email address to activate services in your vehicle.

Included Trial Period For New Vehicles

Your new vehicle may come with an included trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian™ services starting on the date of vehicle purchase. To get started with your trial, enrollment in SiriusXM Guardian™ is required. The Uconnect 4C/4C NAV includes a trial* of SiriusXM Guardian™ services from your date of purchase.

* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.

Features And Packages

After the trial period, you must purchase a subscription to continue your services by calling a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.

GETTING STARTED WITH CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES

Download The Uconnect App

Once you have activated your services, you're only a few steps away from using connected services.

Uconnect Mobile App

1 – Settings
2 - Vehicle Info
3 – Location And Send & Go
4 - Remote Commands

• Download the Uconnect app to your mobile device.
• Use your Owner Account login and password to open the app and then set up a PIN.

A0401000291US

- For customers in the United States, visit www.mopar.com, and click the Sign In/Register button in the upper right-hand corner to register your account online.

a. Click the Register button
b. Select the correct country and email address then click "Register".

c. You will then receive an email notification to confirm/verify your newly created account.
d. After clicking the email link, it will take you to a website and prompt you to assign your account with a password.
e. Once you have added a password, the website will direct you to your homepage where you can add in your vehicle's VIN.

- For customers in Canada, register your account via your vehicle.

a. Press the Apps button in the bottom menu bar.
b. Press the Activate Services button from the apps list.
c. Enter your email and press "OK". A confirmation email will be sent to the provided email address.
d. Press "Continue Activation" from the confirmation email. It may take a short time before remote services will be available, but you will be able to log into the Uconnect App and the owner's site.

• Once on the Remote screen and you have set up your four-digit PIN, you can begin using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
• Press the Location button on the bottom menu bar of the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send a location to your Uconnect Navigation, if equipped.
• Press the Settings side menu in the upper left corner of the app to bring up app settings and access the Assist Call Centers.

Using Your Owner's Site

Your Owner's Site website https://www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents), or www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) provides you with all the information you need, all in one place. You can track your service history, find recommended accessories for your vehicle, watch videos about your vehicle's features, and easily access your manuals. It is also where you can manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account. This section will familiarize you with the key elements of the website that will help you get the most of your SiriusXM Guardian™ system. For customers in the United States, press the Sign In/Register button and enter your email address and password.

For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle button. Select from "Dashboard", "Vehicle Health Report", and "Recalls". The website will then prompt you to log in using your email address and password.

- Edit/Edit Profile:

To manage the details of your SiriusXM Guardian™ account, such as your contact information, password and SiriusXM Guardian™ PIN, click on the Edit/Edit Profile button to access the details of your account.

- Connected Services Status:

This statement will indicate your SiriusXM Guardian™-equipped vehicle.

- Remote Commands:

For vehicles with an active SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription, press one of these icons and enter your four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN to remotely start (if equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the horn and flash the lights.

Editing Your Notifications

Notifications are an important element of your SiriusXM Guardian™ account. For example, any time you use your remote services (such as Remote Door Unlock), you can elect to receive a text message, push notification, and/or E-mail to notify you of the event. To set up the notifications, please follow these instructions.

1. Log on to your Owner's Account at https://www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents) and select "Dashboard", or www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents), select "My Vehicle" and then "Dashboard".
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.
3. Once there, select "SiriusXM Guardian™" where you can edit Notification Preferences.
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email address to notify you, and you can customize the types of messages.

USING SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™

SOS Call

WARNING!

Some SiriusXM Guardian™ services, including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without a network connection compatible with your device.

Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A Button

Center Light Status	Description
Off No call activated
Green Active call in progress
Red System error

SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance Features

With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has onboard assistance features located on the rearview mirror or overhead console designed to enhance your driving experience if you should ever need assistance or support.

Description

SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent in the event of an emergency. When the connection between the vehicle and the live agent is made, your vehicle will automatically transmit location information. In the event of a minor collision, medical or any other emergency, press the SOS button to be connected to a call center agent who can send emergency assistance to your vehicle's location.

NOTE:

Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are dependent on an operational Uconnect system, cellular network availability that is compatible with the device in your vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.

How It Works

1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator light will turn green indicating a call has been placed.

NOTE:

- In case the SOS Call button is accidentally pushed, there is a 10-second delay before the SOS call is placed. The system will verbally alert you that a call is about to be made. To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS Call button on the rearview mirror or press the Cancel button on the touchscreen within 10 seconds.

- During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth® paired phone is disconnected so incoming or outgoing calls will go through your mobile device versus the hands-free system which is not available due to the SOS Call.

1. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent is made, the agent will stay on the line with you.

NOTE:

Calls between the vehicle occupants and the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may be recorded or monitored for quality assurance purposes. Through your enrollment in and use of the SiriusXM Guardian™ services, you consent to being recorded.

SOS Call System Limitations

Vehicles that have been purchased in the US and that travel into Mexico and Canada may have limited services. In particular, responses to SOS calls or other emergency services may be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles purchased outside the United States and Canada are unable to receive SiriusXM Guardian™ services.

If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected:

• The light will continuously be illuminated red.
• The screen will display the following message "Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your dealer."
• An in-vehicle audio message will state "Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your dealer."

Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLC's control may prevent or stop SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors:

• The ignition key is in OFF position.

• The vehicle's electrical systems are not intact.

• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.

• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware is damaged during a vehicle crash.
• LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage and/or GPS signals are unavailable or obstructed.
  • Network congestion.
• Weather conditions.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.

If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason (including during or after an accident) the SOS Call system, among other vehicle systems, will not operate.

Requirements

• This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the US or Canada.
• Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™ system. Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and have an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.
• Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compatible with your device.
• Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC (Accessory) position with a properly functioning electrical system.

WARNING!

- Never place anything on or near the vehicle's LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

- Do not add any aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle's electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle's electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), NEITHER THE UCONNECT APPS NOR THE SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ SERVICES WILL OPERATE.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the air bag system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working properly and the SOS Call system may not be able to send a signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service your vehicle immediately.
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could mean you will not have SOS Call services if needed. If the Rearview Mirror Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a SiriusXM Guardian™
  Customer Care agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and regular inspection of your vehicle may result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.

Remote Commands

On the Remote Commands screen, you have access to several vehicle features that can be controlled remotely from your mobile device. These features include locking/unlocking, remote starting, and activating the horn and lights of the vehicle.

Remote Commands

1 - Lock Press this button to lock your vehicle.

2 — Vehicle Start Press this button to start your vehicle.

3 - Horn & Lights Press this button to sound the horn and activate your lights.

4 — Unlock Press this button to unlock your vehicle.

5 — Cancel Vehicle Start Press this button to cancel remote start.

Remote Commands lets you send a request to your vehicle in one of three ways:

• Anywhere using your mobile device and Uconnect App
• From your computer on the Owner's Site (not available on all functions)
• Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care (not available on all functions)

Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile Device And The Uconnect App

1. Press the desired Remote Command icon on your mobile device.

2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same four-digit code established when you activated your SiriusXM Guardian™

system). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN on the keypad.

1. It may take 30 seconds or more for the command to go through to your vehicle.
2. A message will let you know if the command was received by your vehicle.

Using A Remote Command Through Your Owner's Site

1. Log on to your Owner's Site using the username and password you used when activating your SiriusXM Guardian™ services in your vehicle.

NOTE:

If you forgot your username or password, links are provided on the website to help you retrieve them.

1. If you have more than one vehicle registered into your Owner's Site, select the vehicle you want to send the command to by clicking on its image along the top.
2. On your dashboard, you will see remote commands. Press the desired icon to activate that feature.
3. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same four-digit code established when you activated your SiriusXM Guardian™ system). Please enter your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
4. A message will appear on the screen to let you know if the command was received by your vehicle.

Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care (for example, in case of an accidental lock-out):

1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care if you are unable to lock your vehicle through the Uconnect App or your key fob.
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent will verify your identity by asking for your four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN, you can ask them to perform a remote command.

NOTE:

Anyone with access to your PIN may request Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsibility to protect your PIN appropriately.

Remote Door Lock/Unlock

Description

The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your vehicle without the keys and from virtually any distance.

Working Vehicle Conditions

● The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
- The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower reception.
- Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi connection.

Requirements

• Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
• Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection. If using the Uconnect App to command your vehicle, your device must be compatible and be connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
• Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and have an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.
• An ignition cycle is required for some remote commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start and Remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a Remote Horn & Lights activation.
• Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will not be processed if the vehicle is in

motion, the ignition key is on or during an emergency call.

NOTE:

All other remote services should be performed via your Owner's Site or through the Uconnect App on your compatible device.

Remote Vehicle Start

Description

The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you with the ability to start the engine on your vehicle without the keys and from virtually any distance. Once started, the preset climate controls in your vehicle can warm up or cool down the interior.

You can also send a command to turn off an engine that has been started using Remote Vehicle Start. After 15 minutes, if you have not entered your vehicle with the key, the engine will shut off automatically.

This remote function requires your vehicle to be equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start system.

You can set up push notifications every time a command is sent to activate or cancel Remote Start.

Working Vehicle Conditions

• The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
• The vehicle has been started with the key fob within the last 14 days.
• The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
• The vehicle's security system has been armed and not triggered since the last vehicle start.
• The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are closed.
• The vehicle's check engine light must be off.
• The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank of fuel, along with oil and battery power.
• The vehicle's hazard lights must be off.
• If equipped, the vehicle must have an automatic transmission.
• The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower reception.
• Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi connection.

- If the Panic button has been pressed, the vehicle must be started at least once after alarming the system.

NOTE:

The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents are not authorized for Remote Vehicle Start services. Contact the Uconnect Care Team for assistance.

Remote Horn & Lights

Description

It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy parking area by activating the horn and lights. It may also help if you need to draw attention to your vehicle for any reason.

If you want, you can set up push notifications every time a command is sent to turn on the horn and lights.

Working Vehicle Conditions

• The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
• The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower reception.
• Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi connection.

NOTE:

The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed to be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind the surroundings when using this feature. You are responsible for compliance with local laws, rules and ordinances in the location of your vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights.

Roadside Assistance Call

Description

Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™ system feature will contain an ASSIST button in the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM Guardian™ services have been activated, the ASSIST button can connect you directly to customer care call centers. You will be directed to one of the four services below.

• Roadside Assist — If you get a flat tire or need a tow, you'll be connected to someone who can help anytime.

• Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care call center to activate your services, renew after your trial has expired, and for in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM Guardian™ system or help answering any general questions surrounding your connected services.

• Uconnect Care – In-vehicle support for all non-connected Uconnect system features, such as radio and Bluetooth® connections.

• Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.

SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance Features

With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has onboard assistance features located on the rearview mirror or overhead console designed to enhance your driving experience if you should ever need assistance or support.

How It Works

Simply press the ASSIST button in the vehicle and you will be presented with your ASSIST options on the touchscreen. Make your selection by pressing the touchscreen.

Requirements

• This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the US and Canada.

• Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™ system.

• Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.

• Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and have an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.
• Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC (Accessory) position with a properly functioning electrical system.

Disclaimers

If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any additional roadside assistance service costs that you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM Guardian™ services to you, we may record and monitor your conversations with Roadside Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, whether such conversations are initiated through the

SiriusXM Guardian™ services in your vehicle, or via a landline or mobile device, and may share information obtained through such recording and monitoring in accordance with regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree and consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing of information obtained through any such call recordings.

Send & Go

Description

The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect App allows you to search for a destination on your mobile device, and then send the route to your vehicle's navigation system.

Send & Go Send & Go Input

How It Works

1. Use the Uconnect App to find the destination.

There are multiple ways to find a destination. After selecting the "Location" tab at the bottom of the App, press the search box to browse through one of the categories provided, or type the name or keyword in the search box at the top of the App. You can also select categories such as Favorites or Contact List.

1. Select your destination from the list that appears. Location information will then be displayed on the map.

From this screen, you will be able to:

• View the location on a map.
- See the distance from your current location.
- Send the address by selecting "Send to Vehicle" from the mobile app.

1. Send the destination to the Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call the destination by pressing the Call button.

238 MULTIMEDIA

1. Confirm your destination inside your vehicle by pressing the Send To Vehicle option on the pop-up that appears on the radio touchscreen.

Requirements

- Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Uconnect system and a Uconnect 4C or Uconnect 4C NAV unit.

2

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Connected Service Indicators

1 – Activate Services (Connected Services)
2 – Navigation Button

- Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compatible with your device.

LTE Network Connection

- Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and have an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.

Vehicle Finder

Description

The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect App allows you to find the location of your stationary vehicle.

You can also sound the horn and flash the lights to make finding your vehicle even easier.

How It Works

Use the Uconnect App to find the location of your vehicle.

1. Select the "Location" tab at the bottom of the App. Then, touch the Vehicle icon to find your vehicle.
2. Choose how you want to view the information by pressing the layers button. These options will appear:

Vehicle Finder Layers

1 - Map View
2 – Satellite View
3 - Hybrid View
4 - Show Traffic
5 – View Boundaries

1. You can also select the Person icon to see your location.
2. Once the vehicle has been located, you can map a route to your vehicle.

NOTE:

• You are responsible for using remote services that sound horn and flash lights in accordance with the laws, rules and ordinances in effect at the location of your vehicle.
• Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are dependent on a properly installed and operational Uconnect system, cellular network availability that is compatible with the device in your vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.

Requirements

• Vehicle Finder will not work while vehicle is in motion.
• Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Uconnect system.
• Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compatible with your device.
• Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and have an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.
• Vehicle ignition must have been turned on within 14 days.

4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped

Description

4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that connects your device to an LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network that is ready to go wherever you are. After you've made your purchase, turn on your device's Wi-Fi and connect your devices.

• Enables all your passengers to be simultaneously connected to the web.
• Connect several devices at one time.

MULTIMEDIA 239

• Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop or any other portable-enabled media — can connect over your private in-vehicle network.
• A high-speed, secured connection lets anyone on your private network access the Web — great for working and relaxing.

WARNING!

The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot while driving the vehicle as doing so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle

How It Works

The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides the vehicle passengers with an

internet access hotspot in the vehicle, using the radio as an access point. The hotspot will allow Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle devices (such as a laptop or any other portable-enabled media device) to wirelessly connect to the internet. Uconnect offers a complimentary 3-month trial period that includes 1GB of total data. The trial can be activated any time within the first year of new vehicle ownership.

Use one of these three ways to purchase a subscription to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:

1. From your vehicle's touchscreen, select the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the How To Purchase button and follow the instructions.
2. Log onto your Owner's Site and click the link to the AT&T portal to get set up.
3. For existing Connected Car customers: Press the ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T Customer Care agent who will assist you.

Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you can change its name and the password by selecting the Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot button. You can also view the connected devices from the app screen by pressing the View Connected Devices button.

NOTE:

A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not required in order to purchase and use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot.

WARNING!

Always drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel and obey all applicable laws. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications in this vehicle when it is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result in an accident involving in serious injury or death.

Stolen Vehicle Assistance

Description

If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent may be able to locate the stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to help recover it.

How It Works

1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law enforcement as soon as possible. They will work with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care that your vehicle has been stolen.

The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care Agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report number (as issued by your local law enforcement). If you have downloaded the Uconnect App, you can push the "Settings" menu button on your device, select "Help", and then select "SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care" to make the call.

1. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will authenticate that you are the owner of the vehicle and contact the law enforcement with whom you filed the stolen vehicle report.
2. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will work with your local law enforcement to locate the vehicle. You will be contacted by law enforcement if your vehicle is recovered. While the investigation is ongoing, you should also contact your insurance company to inform it of the situation.

Requirements

- Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Uconnect system.

• Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compatible with your device.
• Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and have an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.

NOTE:

Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.

Monthly Vehicle Health Report

Description

Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect service through which a summary of the performance of your vehicle's key systems will be sent to you every month so you can stay on top of your vehicle's maintenance needs. This is provided as a convenience to you and does not substitute for regular maintenance to your vehicle.

In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health Report, the Uconnect system in your vehicle may collect and transmit vehicle data to SiriusXM Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your vehicle's health and performance, your

vehicle's location, your utilization of the features in your vehicle, and other data.

This data collection and transmission begins when you enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will continue even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription unless you call SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care and tell them to deactivate your Uconnect Services.

Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more information, located at www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).

For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™ private policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/privacy-policy.

Vehicle Health Alert

Description

Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a problem with one of your vehicle's key systems. For further information, go to your Owner's website.

NOTE:

Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to register and activate services. During this

process you will be asked to provide an email address to which the reports will be sent.

In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped Description

Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind you when services are needed, or to alert you of other important information, such as recall notices. When you receive a notification through your touchscreen, press OK to dismiss the message, or press Call Care to speak with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.

NOTE:

Pressing OK or the X button on the pop-up screen will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the In-Vehicle Messages mailbox will display. In the Mailbox, you can reopen messages or delete messages.

Amazon Alexa Skill — If Equipped

Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa!

With Amazon Alexa, you can connect to your vehicle and remotely access key services and features.

If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect Navigation, you can send a destination directly to your vehicle using Alexa.

If you need assistance, you can always ask Alexa for help, or complete a list of commands by saying: "Alexa, ask for help with my car."

Here are a few of the many questions you can ask Alexa:

• "Alexa, ask to start my with PIN XXXX."
• "Alexa, ask to lock my with PIN XXXX."
• "Alexa, ask to send 1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my .
• “Alexa, ask what is the fuel level of my .”

An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is required. To use Amazon Alexa, first, register for SiriusXM Guardian™ ↩ page 226.

Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle to Amazon Alexa:

1. Download the Amazon Alexa app on your mobile device (Apple® or Android™).
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to SKILLS.
3. Search for skill, then tap Enable.
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
6. Log in using your Owner Account credentials. This will be the same user name and password you used when registering for SiriusXM Guardian™ Connected Services.
7. CONFIRM account to return to the Skill.
   You can now begin using the Skill on Alexa!

Google Assistant — If Equipped

With the Google Assistant, you can get help and keep tabs on your car. The Assistant is available across your devices, including Android™ phones, iPhone® devices, or voice-activated speakers, like Google Home. If you need assistance, ask Google for help, or for a complete list of commands by saying: "Hey Google, ask for help with my car."

Here are a few examples of commands:

• "Hey Google, ask to start my with PIN XXXX."
• "Hey Google, ask to lock my with PIN XXXX."
• "Hey Google, ask to send 1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my .
• "Hey Google, ask what is the fuel level of my .

To link your Uconnect account with Google Assistant, follow these steps:

1. Download and install the Google Assistant app on your smart phone from the App Store® or Google Play.

2. After installation, log in to the Google Assistant app with your Gmail ID. Verify your account by pressing the icon in the upper right-hand corner.

3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left corner of the screen. Enter the vehicle brand name.
4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect account. Press "Link Uconnect to Google".
5. Press "Sign In" and enter the email address and password you created when you activated Uconnect services.
6. Lastly, press "Authorize" to complete the linking process.
   Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you:
7. Remotely start the engine, or cancel a remote start
8. Send a destination to their vehicle's built-in Uconnect Navigation system
9. Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire press, fuel level and oil life
10. And more!

Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped

Description

Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving and give you peace of mind when your loved ones are out on the road. You can set boundary limits, monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your vehicle's location any time, any place. Use the Uconnect app to set alerts:

• Boundary Alert

Receive a notification the moment your vehicle is driven either out of or into a geographic boundary that you set.

- Curfew Alert

Receive a notification when your car is being driven outside of the curfew time.

- Speed Alert

Receive a notification whenever your car exceeds a speed limit you set.

- Valet Alert

Receive a notification if and when your vehicle is driven outside a quarter-mile radius of a valet drop-off zone.

SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped Description

SmartWatch Integration puts the Uconnect app right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear. To get started, follow these steps:

1. Download the Uconnect app from the App Store® or Google Play.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone using the username and password you created when you first set up your account.
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are connected through Bluetooth®.
4. The Uconnect app should appear on your SmartWatch.

Once the app is downloaded on your SmartWatch, you can enjoy these features:

• Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the remote lock button in the app and entering your security PIN.
• Remote start or stop your vehicle.

- View important vehicle stats, such as fuel level, vehicle location, tire pressure warning, and more.

For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube channel for SmartWatch Integration.

Uconnect Market

With Uconnect Market, you can enjoy seamless and secure transactions from the comfort of your vehicle. Make restaurant reservations, place food orders, or pay for other goods and services right from the vehicle's touchscreen.

To get started with Uconnect Market on the touchscreen:

1. Press the Market button in the Uconnect App drawer.
2. Press "Get Started".
3. Press "Text Me A Link" and enter your phone number to receive a text message with instructions on how to set up Uconnect Market.

NOTE:

If the text message does not come through, press the Resend Text button. It might take a minute to receive the text message.

1. Once you receive the text message, press the link provided. You will be directed to a sign-in screen. Enter your email and password. You will then be able to use Uconnect Market.
2. If you do not have an account, press "Register Now" to create one.
3. Accept the Uconnect Market Terms of Service.
4. Enter your credit card information, and press "Next".
5. Enter your phone number, and press "Next".
6. The system will verify the phone number. Once verified, Uconnect Market will be available to use. Press the OK button.
   From the online portal, https://market.mopar.com/home, you can link loyalty accounts and start receiving benefits from them while still using Uconnect Market and view your purchase history.

MANAGE MY SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ ACCOUNT

To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account, press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.

NOTE:

It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM Guardian™ Care to remove your personal data.

CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs

For additional information about SiriusXM Guardian™, active subscribers can push the ASSIST button and then select SiriusXM Guardian™ Call on your in-vehicle touchscreen to contact SiriusXM Guardian™. Your call will be directed to a SiriusXM Guardian™ agent or held in a queue until an agent is available. If you do not have an active subscription, push the ASSIST button and press the Activate button on the touchscreen to activate services.

CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQ s

1. What happens if I accidentally push the SOS Call button on the mirror? You have 10 seconds after pushing the SOS Call

button to cancel the call. To cancel the call, either push the SOS Call button again, or press the Cancel button on the in-vehicle touchscreen.

1. What type of information is sent when I use the SOS Call button from my vehicle? Certain vehicle information, such as make and model, is transmitted along with the last known GPS location.
2. When could I use the SOS Call button? You can use the SOS Call button to make a call if you or someone else needs emergency assistance.

CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FAQs

1. How long does it take to unlock or lock the door? Depending on various conditions, it can take up to three minutes or more for the request to get to your vehicle.

2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door more quickly, however its range is limited and your Uconnect App comes in handy for these and other situations.

3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device? People sometimes lose their mobile devices, which is why security measures have been engineered into the Uconnect App. Asking for your username, password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN are required for the activation of Remote services through your mobile device. It is your responsibility to protect your passwords and PINs.

4. Why can't all mobile devices use the Uconnect App? The Uconnect App is compatible with most devices with the Apple® and Android™ operating systems. The capabilities of these devices allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other operating systems may be supported in the future.
5. Why is the Uconnect App running slow? The Uconnect App relies on a mobile network connection from your device to send commands to your vehicle which must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G, 4G (data), or 5G (data) network connection. If either your device or your vehicle is in an area with below average coverage, it may take longer to log in and send commands.

CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE FAQs

1. What is the phone number for roadside assistance call? The phone number is:

US: 1-800-521-2779

• Canada: 1-800-363-4869

1. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™, does it cover towing or other expenses incurred by using roadside assistance? No, however your new vehicle may include Roadside Assistance Call services.

CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO FAQs

1. How long does it take to send the route and destination to my vehicle? Depending on various conditions, it can take up to three minutes for the request to get through to your vehicle.

2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you enter your vehicle, and start the engine, the pop-up message stating that you have a new route will appear. There is

an exit button on the pop-up that will cancel the route if selected.

1. Can I select a different route than the most recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you enter the vehicle, and start the engine, the pop-up message offers a "Locations" option. Once "Locations" is selected, you can choose from a list of recently sent destinations.

CONNECTED SERVICES VEHICLE FINDER FAQs

1. Can someone else locate my vehicle? Your vehicle may be located by anyone who has your PIN and access to your account. It is your responsibility to guard your PIN accordingly. See the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ terms of service for more information.

2. How long does it take to sound my horn and flash the lights? Depending on various conditions, it can take three minutes or more for the request to get through to your vehicle.

3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn them on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by pressing the red Panic button.

CONNECTED SERVICES STOLEN VEHICLE ASSISTANCE FAQs

1. Can someone locate my vehicle? To enhance your privacy, and the privacy of others using your vehicle, a stolen vehicle police report is required for you to activate this service. You must involve local law enforcement to have SiriusXM Guardian™ locate your vehicle. We may also locate the vehicle for other law enforcement or government agencies, subject to a valid court order telling SiriusXM Guardian™ to do so. We will also provide the service for FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you have purchased through them.

2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered? After you provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle report, the agent will work together with law

enforcement to try to locate your vehicle. If your vehicle is recovered, you will be contacted by law enforcement.

1. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my insurance rates? Some insurance providers offer lower rates on vehicles equipped with systems that can deter auto theft. When shopping for insurance, be sure to inform the insurance provider of your SiriusXM Guardian™ services subscription to find out if the insurance provider can offer you a lower rate.

NOTE:

Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance companies, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an insurance product. You are responsible for obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle and yourself.

CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE START FAQs

1. How long does it take to remotely start my vehicle? Depending on various conditions, it can take three minutes or more for the request to get through to your vehicle.

2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect App? Your key fob will remote start your vehicle more quickly. However its range is limited. For example, when you are leaving the stadium after the game, you can use the Uconnect App to remote start your vehicle and have the inside of your vehicle comfortable by the time you get to it.

3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless device? People sometimes lose their wireless devices, which is why security measures have been engineered into the Uconnect App. Asking for your username, password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN help to ensure that nobody can start your vehicle if they happen to find your device.

4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle using the App? No. Driving your vehicle still requires the keys to be in the vehicle. The Remote Start feature simply starts the engine to warm up or cool down the interior before you arrive.

5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command? No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop the vehicle.

6. Why can't all mobile devices use the Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been designed to work on most devices with the Apple® and Android™ operating systems. The capabilities of these devices allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other operating systems may be supported in the future.

CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE HORN & LIGHTS FAQs

1. How long does it take to sound my horn and flash the lights? Depending on various conditions, it can take three minutes or more for the request to get through to your vehicle.

2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect App? Your key fob will sound the horn and flash the lights quicker; however, its range is limited.

3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn them on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by pressing the red Panic button. Otherwise, Remote Horn & Lights will continue for a maximum of three minutes.

4. Why can't all mobile devices use the Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been designed to work on most devices with the Apple® and Android™ operating systems. The capabilities of these devices allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other operating systems may be supported in the future.

CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT FAQs

1. How do I register for my SiriusXM Guardian™ account? There are three ways that you can register your SiriusXM Guardian™ Account:

2. Push the Assist button. A call will be placed to an agent who can assist in registering your new account.

3. Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps menu. Select the button to speak with an agent, who can assist in registering your new account.

- Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps menu. Enter your email on the touchscreen and then follow the prompts from the provided email. You will receive an email with an activation link that will be good for 72 hours. Once you click the activation link, you will be prompted to fill out your information and accept Terms and Conditions. Then, you will be directed to the SiriusXM Guardian™ home page to complete your profile and demo the remote services.

1. Why do I need an email address? Without an email address, customers cannot register for SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers need to register so they can subscribe to receive additional services and create a SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN for remote command requests.
2. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™ security PIN? Set up your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN during the registration process. The SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN will be required to authenticate you when accessing your account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or

performing any remote services, such as Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn & Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.

1. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™ security PIN? If you've already activated services and forgot your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN, you can reset the PIN by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner's Site.
2. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ payment account address? Your SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account address can be updated online, or by calling SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in your vehicle. To update online: login to your Owner's Site, and select Edit Profile >SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account.

3. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ profile? Your name, home address, phone number, email address and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated online on your Owner's Site. Log in to your Owner's Site then select Edit Profile to edit your personal information. Make your edits and click Save.

4. Can I try features or packages before I buy them? Your new vehicle purchase may have come with an included trial period for certain Apps and services.

5. Can I access every App and service while driving? No, some applications and services are not available while driving. For your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the touchscreen features while the vehicle is in motion (e.g. key pad).

6. What happens when my subscription comes up for renewal? If you have added a credit card to your account information, your subscription will be automatically renewed for a term length in accordance with the service plan that you have selected at the then current subscription rate and on every renewal date thereafter, unless you cancel your subscription by calling SiriusXM Guardian™ Care. If you have not added a credit card to your account, SiriusXM Guardian™ will send you an email or letter in advance of your expiration date to remind you that your subscription is ending soon.

7. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™ notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your Owner's Site and then update your preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™ customer web portal.

8. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
9. How do I update my credit card information? Login to your Owner's Site, and select Edit Profile, then select SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account.

10. How do I find out how much longer I have on my subscription? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
    You also can visit your Owner's Site and choose a subscription to view its expiration date. When your subscription is about to expire, you will receive an email or letter of notification.

11. Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire subscription? Prorated refunds are provided from the date of cancellation for annual plans or longer. Please see the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms & Conditions for refunds related to billing plans of other lengths and other circumstances.

12. Can I cancel a subscription before it expires? Yes. If you have an annual subscription, your subscription will be canceled the day you cancel. If you have a monthly subscription, your subscription will be canceled on the last day of the month in which you choose to cancel.
13. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle? Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner, you'll want to remove your account information. This process removes all personal information, returns the Uconnect system to its original factory settings, removes all SiriusXM Guardian™ services and account information. To remove your account information from the Uconnect system, contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.

250 MULTIMEDIA

1. What if I forgot to remove my account information before I returned my lease vehicle or sold it? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
2. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network connection compatible with my device is temporarily unavailable? The SOS Call and ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are not connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G, 4G (data), 5G (data) network. Services that required your smartphone only direct calls to Roadside Assistance Call may be functioning if you have an operable network.

DATA COLLECTION & PRIVACY

The Uconnect system collects and transmits data which may include information about your vehicle, your vehicle's health and performance, your vehicle's location, your utilization of the features in your vehicle, and other data. The collection, use and sharing of this information is required to provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ services and is further described by the Uconnect Privacy Policy, which can be found at www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/ privacy.html (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). This information may be collected by SiriusXM® Connected Vehicle Services Inc. and shared with FCA US LLC for the purposes stated in the Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle health and diagnostic information including location data may be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle Health Report to you.

Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription, this vehicle diagnostic health information, including location data, may still be transmitted from your vehicle and you may still have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.

Use of any of the Uconnect Services including SiriusXM Guardian™ is deemed to be your consent to the collection, use and disclosure of this information in accordance with the Uconnect Privacy Policy. If you do not want this information to be collected, used, or shared, you must cancel your Uconnect services in their entirety by contacting us as referenced in the Uconnect Privacy Policy.

UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

Your Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System (if equipped) plays your favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray™ Discs, listen to audio over the wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of video games or audio devices.

GETTING STARTED

- Lift the LCD screen located in the rear of the front seats.

RSE System Screen

A1017000050US

• Place the ignition in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
• If equipped with a Blu-ray™ disc player, the icon will be present on the player.
• Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment System by pushing the power button on the remote control.
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/Blu-ray™ disc is inserted into the disc player, the screen(s) turn(s) on automatically, the headphone transmitters turn on, and playback begins.

RSE System Channel 1

• With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 on the remote control and headphones refers to Screen 1 (driver's side), and Channel 2 on the remote control and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (passenger side). The remote control and headphones channel 1 and 2 refer to screen 1 (driver's side) and screen 2 (passenger's side).
• The system can be controlled either by the front seat occupants utilizing the touchscreen radio or by the rear seat occupants using the remote control.

A1023000007US
RSE System Remote Control Channel Selectors

RSE System Headphone Channel Selectors

DUAL VIDEO SCREEN

NOTE:

Typically there are two different ways to operate the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System:

• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (if equipped)

PLAY A BLU-RAY™ DISC

The Blu-ray™ disc player is located in the center console.

Blu-ray™ Disc Player Location

1. Insert a Blu-ray™ disc into the disc player with the label facing as indicated on the Blu-ray™ player. The radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen, the language screen, or starts playing the first track.

2. To watch a Blu-ray™ disc on Channel 1 for driver's side rear passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switches are on Channel 1.

3. To watch a Blu-ray™ disc on Channel 2 for passenger side rear passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switches are on Channel 2.

NOTE:

• To view a Blu-ray™ disc on the radio, press the Media button on the touchscreen, and then press the Disc button. Press the Play button, and then the Full Screen button.
• Viewing a Blu-ray™ disc on the front radio screen is not available in all states/provinces. To view the disc, the vehicle must be stopped, and the gear selector must be in the PARK position.

Using The Front Touchscreen Radio

Rear Media Control Screen

1. RSE Channel 1 Mode

Indicates the current source for Screen 1/Channel 1. This button will be highlighted when it is being controlled by the front user. If this button is not highlighted, press the button to access controls for Screen 1/Channel 1 source.

2. RSE Power

Press to turn RSE On/Off.

3. RSE Mute

Mute rear headphones for the current ignition cycle. Pressing mute again will unmute rear headphones.

4. RSE Remote Control Lock-Out

Press to enable/disable remote control functions.

5. RSE Channel 2 Mode

Indicates the current source for Screen 2/Channel 2. This button will be highlighted when it is being controlled by the front user. If this button is not highlighted, press the button to access controls for Screen 2/Channel 2 source.

6. RSE Source

Press this button to change the source for the active (highlighted) rear Screen/Channel on the Rear Media Control screen.

7. Radio Full Screen Mode

Press this button to change to Full Screen Mode.

8. Cabin Audio Mode

Press this button to change the cabin audio to the rear entertainment source currently shown on the Rear Media Control screen.

• Press the Media button on the touchscreen, and then press the Rear Media button on the touchscreen.
• Press the OK button on the touchscreen to begin playing the Blu-ray™ disc.

Using The Remote Control

• Select an audio channel (Channel 1 and Channel 2), and then press the source key. Using the Up and Down arrows, highlight Disc from the menu and press the OK button.
• Press the pop-up/menu key to navigate the disc menu and options.

254 MULTIMEDIA

Using The Remote Control

1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at Channel 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then push ENTER/OK.

Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment Screen

Using The Touchscreen Radio

1. Press the Media button on the Uconnect system touchscreen.
2. Press the Rear Media button to display the Rear Media Control screen.

Rear Media Control Screen

1. Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen, and then the select source button on the touchscreen. Press the Disc button on the touchscreen in the Media column. To exit, press the X at the top right of the screen.

Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen

NOTE:

Pressing the screen on the radio while a DVD or Blu-ray™ Disc is playing brings up the basic remote control functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner will turn off the remote control screen functions.

PLAY EXTERNAL DEVICE

Connect the external device to the Audio/Video RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side of each seat.

These inputs enable the monitor to display video directly from a video camera, connect video games, or play music directly from an MP3 player.

Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks

When connecting an external source to the AUX/HDMI input, be sure to follow the standard color coding for the audio/video jacks:

1. Right audio in (red)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Video in (yellow)
4. HDMI Input

NOTE:

Certain high-end video games' consoles may exceed the power limit of the vehicle's Power Inverter.

IMPORTANT NOTES FOR DUAL VIDEO SCREEN SYSTEM

• The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously.
• The Blu-ray™ Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs, and Blu-ray™ Discs.
• Selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video source will display on Channel 1 and can be heard on Channel 1.
• Selecting a video source on Channel 2, the video source will display on Channel 2 and can be heard on Channel 2.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even when the screen(s) are closed.

BLU-RAY™ DISC PLAYER REMOTE CONTROL

A0423000013US
Blu-ray™ Player Remote Control

Controls And Indicators

1. —Turns the screen and wireless headphone transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear audio while the screen is closed, push the Power button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. —Push to navigate menus.
3. OK — Push to select the highlighted option in a menu.
4. — Push to navigate menus.
5. —Push to navigate menus.
6. BACK — Push to exit out of menus or return to source selection screen.
7. —Mutes headphone audio.
8. —Push and hold to fast rewind through the current audio track or video chapter.

9. —Stops disc play.

10. Push to navigate chapters or titles.

11. 1/2 When a button is pushed, the current channel or channel button is illuminated momentarily.

12. SOURCE — Push to enter Source Selection screen.

13. Channel/Screen Selector Switch — Indicates which channel is being controlled by the remote control. When the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (left screen). When the selector switch is in the Channel 2 position, the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 2 (right screen).

14. ▶ Push to navigate menus.

15. SETUP — Push to access the screen settings menu.

16. Push and hold to fast forward through the current audio track or video chapter.

17. Begin/resume or pause disc play.

18. Four Colored Buttons — Push to access Blu-ray™ Disc features.
19. POPUP/MENU — Push to bring up repeat and shuffle options, the Blu-ray™ Disc pop-up menu, the DVD title menu, or to access disc menus.

The headphones receive two separate channels of audio using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.

If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control, verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not muted, and the headphone channel selector switch is on the desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that the batteries are charged.

Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones

1 - Power Button
2 - Volume Control
3 – Channel Selection Switch

CONTROLS

The headphone power indicator and controls are located on the right ear cup.

NOTE:

The rear video system must be turned on before sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off approximately three minutes after the rear video system is turned off.

Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones

1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector switch is in the same position as the headphone selector switch. NOTE:

2. When both the headphone and the remote control channel selector switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned to the audio on Channel 1.

3. When both the headphone and the remote control channel selector switches are on Channel 2, the remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned to the audio on Channel 2.

4. Push the SOURCE button on the remote control to advance to the next mode.

5. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to the available modes and push the OK button to select the new mode.
6. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the Back button on the remote control.

REPLACING THE HEADPHONE BATTERIES

Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:

1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of the headphones, and then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Return the battery compartment cover.

ACCESSIBILITY — IF EQUIPPED

Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray™ system that announces a function prior to performing the action ➤ page 174.

STEREO HEADPHONE LIFETIME LIMITED WARRANTY

Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers the initial user or purchaser ("you" or "your") of this particular Aptiv PLC ("Aptiv") wireless headphone ("Product"). The warranty is not transferable.

How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts as long as you own the Product.

What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal use is defective in workmanship or materials.

What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty does not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse, abuse, or modification of the Product other than by Aptiv. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time through normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). APTIV IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS APTIV LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you.

This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.

What Will Aptiv Do? Aptiv, at its option, will repair or replace any defective Product. Aptiv reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product with a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY FOR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

If you have any questions or comments regarding your Aptiv wireless headphones, please email [e-mail] or phone: [phone].

System Information

Disc Menu

When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing the remote control's POP-UP/MENU button displays a list of all commands which control playback of the disc.

Display Settings

When watching a video source (Blu-ray™ Disc or DVD Video with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pushing the remote control's SETUP button activates the Display Settings menu. These settings control the appearance of the video on the screen. The factory default settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these settings under normal circumstances.

To change the settings, push the remote control's Navigation buttons to select an item, then push the remote control's Navigation buttons to change the value for the currently selected item. To reset all values back to the original settings, select the Default Settings menu option and push the remote control's ENTER/OK button.

Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray™ Disc player's settings of DVD being watched in the remote player.

Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed

To listen to only the audio portion of the channel with the screen closed:

• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
• Close the video screen.
• To change the current audio mode, push the remote control's Source button. This will automatically select the next available audio mode without using the Mode/Source Select menu.
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will automatically turn back on and show the appropriate display menu or media.

If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify that the headphones are turned on (the On indicator is illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push the remote control's power button to turn audio on. If audio is still not heard, check that the batteries are fully charged.

Disc Errors

If the Blu-ray™ Disc player is unable to read the disc, a "Disc Error" message is displayed on the rear screen and Radio displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a "Disc Error" message.

If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray™ Disc player will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the end of the disc is reached, the Blu-ray™ Disc player will return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the first track.

The Blu-ray™ Disc player may shut down during extremely hot conditions, such as when the vehicle's interior temperature is above 120°F (48.9°C). When this occurs, the player will display "High Temp" and will shut off the rear seat displays until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the Blu-ray™ Disc player.

Product Agreement

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by US patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby", "MLP Lossless", and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning the mobile phone, it is recommended that the volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using the Uconnect system.

REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION

US/CANADA

Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation

The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the human body.

The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.

The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio ➤ page 414.

OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle is equipped with Off-Road Pages, which provides the vehicle status while operating on off-road conditions. It supplies information relating to the vehicle ride height, the status of the transfer case, the pitch and roll of the vehicle, and the active Selec-Terrain mode.

To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps button on the touchscreen, and then select "Off-Road Pages".

1 — Uconnect Apps Button
2 - Off-Road Pages App

Off-Road Pages has the following selectable pages:

• Vehicle Dynamics

• Suspension

• Pitch & Roll — If Equipped

• Accessory Gauge
• Selec-Terrain — If Equipped

OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR

The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of the five selectable page options. It provides continually updating information for the following items:

1. Current Transfer Case Status (only appears when in 4WD Low)
2. Current Selec-Terrain mode — If Equipped
3. Current Latitude/Longitude
4. Current Altitude of the vehicle
5. Status of Hill Descent
6. Selec-Speed Control and Selected Speed in mph (km/h)

1 – Transfer Case Status (Only When In 4WD Low)
2 — Selec-Terrain Mode — If Equipped
3 – Current Latitude/Longitude
4 – Current Altitude
5-Hill Descent
6 — Selec-Speed Status And Set Speed

VEHICLE DYNAMICS

The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information concerning the vehicle's drivetrain.

The following information is displayed:

• Steering angle in degrees
• Status of Transfer Case
- Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped

Vehicle Dynamics Menu

1 – Steering Angle
2 – Transfer Case Status
3 — Rear Axle Locker Status

SUSPENSION

The Suspension page displays information regarding the vehicle's suspension.

The following information is displayed:

1. Suspension Articulation Indicator
2. Current Ride Height Status — If Equipped
3. Normal
4. Off-Road 1
5. Off-Road 2
6. Entry/Exit
7. Aero

NOTE:

The wheel articulation will be represented by a yellow color in the Suspension Articulation Indicator. If Ride Height is adjusted, the Ride Height Indicator on the screen will switch to the appropriate height and the Suspension Articulation Indicator will show the movement and change in height.

Suspension Menu

1 – Suspension Articulation Indicator
2 — Current Ride Height

PITCH & ROLL

The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle's current pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side) in degrees. The pitch and roll gauges provide a visualization of the current vehicle angle.

1 – Current Pitch
2 - Current Roll

ACCESSORY GAUGES

The Accessory Gauges page displays the current status of the vehicle's Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature, Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only), Transmission Temperature, and Battery Voltage.

1 – Coolant Temperature
2 - Oil Temperature
3 - Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only)
4 – Transmission Temperature
5 – Battery Voltage

SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED

The Selec-Terrain page displays the current Selec-Terrain mode through a high resolution image. Adjusting the Selec-Terrain mode will alter the image on the screen. The vehicle must be in the ON/RUN position to display Selec-Terrain information.

The selectable modes are as follows:

• Auto – Default
• Snow
• Sand
• Mud
• Rock – Vehicle Must Be In 4WD Low

NOTE:

While in the Selec-Terrain pages, the Off-Road Pages Status Bar will also display the current Selec-Terrain mode.

Current Selec-Terrain Mode

SAFETY

SAFETY FEATURES

The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.

The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound, as well as some related motor noises.

The ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).

You also may experience the following normal characteristics when the ABS activates:

• ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
• Brake pedal pulsations
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop

The ABS is designed to function with the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.

WARNING!

- The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.

If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System (TCS). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.

Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control (HDC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Select-Speed Control (SSC) and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).

Brake System Warning Light

The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle's braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not "pump" the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)

DST is a feature of the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives that the feature is active is the torque applied to the steering wheel.

NOTE:

The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize the correct course of action through small torques on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the DST feature is highly dependent on the driver's sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very important to realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering the vehicle.

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

EBD function manages the distribution of the braking torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver's steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle's speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.

NOTE:

ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in "Full Off" mode (if equipped). See ➤ page 267 for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

ESC enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the above conditions. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.

• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.

The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the Traction Control System (TCS) is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

WARNING!

- Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

- Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

ESC Operating Modes

Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.

ESC On

This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.

Partial Off

This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed.

To enter the "Partial Off" mode, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.

NOTE:

For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push and release of the button will toggle the ESC modes. Multiple attempts may be required to return to "ESC On".

WARNING!

• When in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS functionality of ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in "Partial Off" mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the "Partial Off" mode.

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light

The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It should go out with the engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater

than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.

NOTE:

• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previously.

270 SAFETY

- The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped

HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during various

driving situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.

HDC Has Three States:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed).

Enabling HDC

HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:

• The driveline is in 4WD Low.
- The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
- The parking brake is released.
• The driver door is closed.

Activating HDC

Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/- . The following summarizes the HDC set speeds:

HDC Target Set Speeds

• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not activate.
  • R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
  • N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
  • D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) - if equipped

NOTE:

During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC target speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission. When actively controlling HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.

Driver Override

The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or brake application at any time.

Deactivating HDC

HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur:

• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.

Disabling HDC

HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the following conditions occur:

● The driver pushes the HDC switch.
- The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
- The parking brake is applied.
- The driver door opens.
- The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.

• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
  • HDC detects excessive brake temperature.

Feedback To The Driver

The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.

- The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is the normal operating condition for HDC.

- The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds, then extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.

- The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds, then extinguish when HDC disables due to excess speed.

- The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have cooled sufficiently.

WARNING!

HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.

The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate:

• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• The parking brake must be off.
• The driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.

272 SAFETY

• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.

WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver's responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury.

Disabling And Enabling HSA

This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting using the Uconnect Settings, see → page 174.

Towing With HSA

HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while towing a trailer.

WARNING!

• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
  ● Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury.

Rain Brake Support (RBS)

RBS may improve braking performance in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.

Ready Alert Braking (RAB)

RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.

Select-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped

SSC is intended for off-road driving in 4WD Low only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling engine torque and brakes.

SSC has three states:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)

2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application)

3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed)

Enabling SSC

SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:

• The driveline is in 4WD Low.
  ● The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• The parking brake is released.
• The driver door is closed.
• The driver is not applying throttle.

Activating SSC

Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the following conditions are met:

• The driver releases the throttle.
  ● The driver releases the brake.

• The transmission is in any selection other than PARK.
  ● The vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).

The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a grade and the level of set speed reduction depends on the magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC set speeds:

SSC Target Set Speeds

• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) - if equipped
• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
  ● NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)

- PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active

NOTE:

• During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for SSC target speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission. While actively controlling SSC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
• SSC operation is influenced by Off Road+ drive mode if active. The differences may be notable to the driver as a varying level of aggressiveness.

Driver Override:

The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or brake application at any time.

Deactivating SSC

SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur:

• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake application
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h)
• Vehicle is shifted to PARK

Disabling SSC

SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following conditions occur:

• The driver pushes the SSC switch.
  ● The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
• The parking brake is applied.

- The driver door opens.

- The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.

- The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) (SSC exits immediately).

Feedback To The Driver:

The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about the state SSC is in.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This is the normal operating condition for SSC.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the SSC switch but enable conditions are not met.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to excess speed.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated brakes.

WARNING!

SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when driving in off road conditions. The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

Traction Control System (TCS)

The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similarly to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine power to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.

NOTE:

TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations ➤ page 153.

When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the "Partial Off" or "Full Off" modes.

WARNING!

If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS

BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED

BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.

Rear Detection Zones

When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE (R).

The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the side of the vehicle, near the B-pillar, and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.

NOTE:

• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)

extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in random false detections on the trailer, and false chimes when the turn signal is used.

- The BSM system may experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small object remains at the side of the vehicle for extended periods of time (more than a couple of seconds).

The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud, or other road contaminations accumulate on the rear fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located. The system may also detect blockage if the vehicle is operated in areas with extremely low radar returns such as a desert or parallel to a large elevation drop. If blockage is detected, a "Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe Rear Corners" message will display in the cluster, both mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP alerts will not occur. This is normal operation. The system will automatically recover and resume function when the condition clears. To minimize system

276 SAFETY

blockage, do not block the area of the rear fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear of road contaminations.

Sensor Location

The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors. In addition, when the turn signal is activated during the alert on the side of the vehicle corresponding to the alert, an audible (chime) alert can be heard. During this audible (chime) alert, the radio volume will be reduced. See ➤ page 278 in this section for further information.

Warning Light Location

The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.

Entering From The Side

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle.

Entering From The Rear

Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

Overtaking Traffic

If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.

Overtaking/Approaching

A0502000168US

Overtaking/Passing

A0502000167US

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service.

The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes ↩ page 414.

Opposing Traffic

A0502000165US

WARNING!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicle's mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

Rear Cross Path (RCP)

RCP is a feature that is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

RCP Detection Zones

RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.

NOTE:

In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver.

When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.

WARNING!

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

Blind Spot Modes

Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation that are available in the Uconnect system.

Blind Spot Alert Lights Only

When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.

Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime

When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.

NOTE:

Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio is also muted.

When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime.

Blind Spot Alert Off

When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.

NOTE:

The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started, the previously stored mode will be recalled and used.

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH MITIGATION

FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.

NOTE:

FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required.

If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may provide the maximum or partial braking to mitigate the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes.

When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated.

NOTE:

• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph (2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles, such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality.

280 SAFETY

• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low or ESC "Full-Off" mode is active, the FCW system will be automatically deactivated → page 414.

WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.

FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity

The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are programmable through the Uconnect system ↩ page 174.

The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting and the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it applies autonomous braking.

Changing the FCW status to the "Far" setting allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the latter is at a farther distance than "Medium" setting. This provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.

Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front when the distance between the vehicle in the front is much closer. This setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.

NOTE:

- Changing the FCW status to "Only Warning" prevents the system from providing limited active braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the

event of a potential frontal collision, but maintains the audible and visual warnings.

• Changing the FCW status to "Off" prevents the system from providing autonomous braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable screens.

FCW Limited Warning

If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active

braking may not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will return to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.

Service FCW Warning

If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays:

• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
  • Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required

This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven — this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

See ↩ page 377 on how to properly inflate the vehicle's tires.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to be turned off.

NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.

The system will automatically update and the TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle's recommended cold tire pressure value.

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a poor overall system performance or sensor damage. Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if underinflation

has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.

- Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.

Tire Pressure PSI
A0502000151US

Tire Pressure Monitoring Display

NOTE:

It is particularly important for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure ↩ page 414.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, which display in the instrument cluster, and a graphic displaying tire pressures
• TPMS Warning Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated, when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the instrument cluster will display an "Inflate to XX" message and a graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) in a different color.

NOTE:

Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI, BAR, or kPa.

Low Tire Pressure Monitoring Display

Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a different color on the graphic display to the vehicle's recommended cold tire pressure displayed in the "Inflate to XX" message.

NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.

The system will automatically update, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will return to its original color and the TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.

Service TPMSystem Warning

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. The instrument cluster display will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds. This message is then followed by a graphic display, with "--" in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor(s) is not being received.

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will no longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will not be present, and a pressure

284 SAFETY

value will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by any of the following:

• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPMS sensors
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings
  • Using tire chains on the vehicle
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors

NOTE:

There is no Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor in the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will remain on, a chime will sound, and the instrument cluster display will still display a pressure value in the different color graphic display and an "Inflate to XX" message will be displayed. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster display will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument cluster display will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically.

In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster display will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.

To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will display the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message and then display dashes (-) in place of the pressure values.

Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or display the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure values.

To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message and then display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle

the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS FEATURES

• Seat Belt Systems
  • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
  • Supplemental Active Head Restraints
• Child Restraints

Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.

IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in the appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating position ↩ page 304.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint ↩ page 304.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, see ➤ page 410 for customer service contact information.

WARNING!

- Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.

SEAT BELT SYSTEMS

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)

Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)

1. BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.

Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.

Change of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.

NOTE:

If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.

WARNING!

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won't be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can't straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren't as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

1. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

1. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

Positioning The Lap Belt

1. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
2. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,

and move it up or down to the position that serves you best.

Adjustable Anchorage

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position.

NOTE:

The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button.

To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.

WARNING!

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
  ● Always make all seat belt height adjustments when the vehicle is stationary.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.

WARNING!

• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant's body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.

Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE:

These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature

The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an Energy Management feature that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system → page 304.

The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position.

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant's

mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

WARNING!

- Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

- Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING!

• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.

Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)

These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.

How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant's head and the AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts.

NOTE:

The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact. However, if during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.

Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:

Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components

1 - Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam And Trim)
2 - Seat Back
3 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 – Head Restraint Guide Tubes

WARNING!

• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint, ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed.

NOTE:

For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint, see ➤ page 38.

Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)

A0503000792U5

Active Head Restraint (AHR) Deployed

If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a collision, the front half of the head restraint will be extended forward and separated from the rear half of the head restraint (See Image). Do not drive your vehicle after the AHRs have deployed. The head restraint must be reset into the original position to best protect the occupant for all types of collisions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer must reset the AHRs on the driver's and front passenger's seat before driving. Personally attempting to reset the AHRs may result in damage to the AHRs that could impair their function.

WARNING!

Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs reset by an authorized dealer immediately.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)

Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.

The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag System Components:

Air Bag System Components

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
- Instrument Panel
- Knee Impact Bolsters
- Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
- Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
- Seat Belt Pretensioners

Air Bag Warning Light

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the

START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

- The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE:

If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won't have the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning

Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately page 88.

Front Air Bags

This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" are embossed on the air bag covers.

Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations

1 – Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Knee Air Bag
3 – Passenger Knee Impact Bolster

WARNING!

- Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front air bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.

Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.

Front Air Bag Operation

Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.

When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.

WARNING!

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.

Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" on a label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback's trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) are located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG."

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events.

WARNING!

• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.

Side Impacts

The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the

severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes.

WARNING!

• Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags.

NOTE:

Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

Rollover Events

Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.

Air Bag System Components

NOTE:

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
- Instrument Panel
- Knee Impact Bolsters
- Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
- Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
- Seat Belt Pretensioners

If A Deployment Occurs

The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

NOTE:

Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or

eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System
• Unlock the power door locks

Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident Response System:

- Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door

302 SAFETY

- Cut off battery power to the:

• Engine
  • Electric Motor (if equipped)
  • Electric power steering
• Brake booster
  • Electric park brake
  ● Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
• Front wiper
  • Headlamp washer pump

NOTE:

After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system by following the procedure described below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.

Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have the Enhanced Accident Response System reset.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

- Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

CHILD RESTRAINTS

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child's size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner's Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner's Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.

NOTE:

• For additional information, refer to http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-care-givers or call: 1-888-327-4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada's website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/child-car-seat-safety.html

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

	Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers	Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint	Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children	Children who are at least two years old or who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint	Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children	Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle's seat belt	Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints	Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster seat	Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle

Infant And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.

WARNING!

- Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.

Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.

Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle's seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle's seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child's knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat - while the child is still sitting all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child's shoulder between the neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child's thighs and not the stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was "no," then the child still needs to use a booster

seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child's squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type	Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint	Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
		LATCH – Lower Anchors Only	Seat Belt Only	LATCH – Lower Anchors + Top Tether Anchor	Seat Belt + Top Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint	Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)	X	X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint	More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg)		X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint	Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)			X	X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint	More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg)				X

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System

022668173

LATCH Label

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle's seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle

A0503000800US

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle

Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?	65 lbs (29.5 kg)	Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?	No	Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint. Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner's manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating positions?	No	Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?	No	Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?	Yes	The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner's manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes		The head restraint may be removed in only the center seating position if it interferes with the installation of the child restraint ➔ page 38.

Locating The LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

LATCH Anchorages

Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.

Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap Anchorage

Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap Anchorage

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH Vehicle With A Center Arm Rest Tether

WARNING!

• Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. See page 311 for typical installation instructions.

For rear-facing child restraints secured in the center seat position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in the upward position.

1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and hooked onto the plastic seat backing.

Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether

1. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic seat backing.

2. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the strap located on the front of the arm rest.

Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether

Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See ➔ page 313 to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.

312 SAFETY

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See ➞ page 315 for directions to attach a tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child's reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it

behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.

WARNING!

• Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be "switched" into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor.

See the "Automatic Locking Mode" description page 291 for additional information on ALR.

Please see the table below and the following sections for more information.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle

A0503000799US

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?	Weight limit of the Child Restraint	Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?	Yes	Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes		The head restraint may be removed in only the center seating position if it interferes with the installation of the child restraint ➔ page 38.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint?	No	Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.

• Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

• Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

• Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

• Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
• Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
• To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.

• Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

• Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.

• If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See page 315 for directions to attach a tether anchor.
• Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage:

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See page 308 for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

316 SAFETY

1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.

Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap Anchorage

Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located On Seatback)

1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.

2. For the center seating position, route the tether strap over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

Top Tether Strap Mounting

1. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING!

- The top tether anchorages are not visible until the gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind the seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seat-backs as you remove slack in the strap.

SAFETY TIPS

TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSEYGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.

WARNING!

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

TRANSPORTING PETS

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.

Air Bag Warning Light

The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN mode. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault

318 SAFETY

with the Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately ↕ page 285.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of your vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver's side floor mat on the driver's side floor area. To check for interference, with the vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger's side floor mat on the passenger's side floor area.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the driver's side floor area when the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the position of the floor mat and may cause interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check your floor mat has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.

PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.

EXHAUST GAS

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:

• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

- If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:

- Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

- Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located on the switch bank just above the climate controls.

Hazard Warning Flashers Switch

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning Flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE:

With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may discharge the battery.

ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED

1 - SOS Button

2 - ASSIST Button

If equipped, the rearview mirror contains a SOS and an ASSIST button.

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber ➤ page 414.
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network, which comes as a built in function. Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.

ASSIST Call

The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers:

• Roadside Assistance - If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you will be connected to a representative for assistance. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you're driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside assistance.
• SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care - In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other vehicle issues.
• Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for Radio, Phone and NAV issues.

SOS Call

1. Push the SOS Call button on the rearview Mirror.

NOTE:

In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator.

To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button on the rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the rearview Mirror.

1. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS buttons on the rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a SOS operator has been made.
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a SOS operator:
3. Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call
4. The vehicle brand

5. The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle

6. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional assistance is needed.

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle's SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional assistance is needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle's SOS Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle's SOS Call system will attempt to remain

connected with the SOS operator until the SOS operator terminates the connection.

1. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.

WARNING!

• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle's operable network and GPS antennas. You could prevent operable network and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is required for the SOS Call system to function properly.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle's electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle's electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle's electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you.

324 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SOS Call System Limitations

Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system capabilities.

SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.

If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:

• The rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message "Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer."
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state "Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer."

WARNING!

• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.

Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLC's control may prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors:

• The ignition is in the OFF position
- The vehicle's electrical systems are not intact
- The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are damaged during a crash

• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
• Operator error by the SOS operator
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
• Weather
  • Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data page 414 as authorized by the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle's LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to function properly.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

Automatic SOS — If Equipped

Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can immediately connect you with help in the event that your vehicle's airbags deploy. Please refer to your provided radio supplement for complete information.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING

CAUTION!

Always lift or jack the vehicle from the correct jacking points. Failure to follow this information could cause damage to the vehicle or underbody components.

For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift, to disable the automatic leveling feature

page 170.

326 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery surfaces.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.

1. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the driver's front tire, block the passenger's rear wheel.

Wheel Blocked

Load Floor

NOTE:

Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.

JACK LOCATION

The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located in the rear cargo area, below the load floor.

Spare Tire/Jack And Tools

1 - Capless Fuel Fill Funnel
2 - Jack
3 - Tire Changing Tools
4 – Spare Tire

SPARE TIRE STOWAGE — IF EQUIPPED

The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear cargo area and is secured to the body with a special fastener.

Spare Tire Fastener

JACKING INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmission in PARK.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground.

060600714

Jack Warning Label

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.

328 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage. Turn the fastener counterclockwise to remove the spare tire.

Removing Spare Tire Fastener

1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts, using the lug wrench by turning them counterclockwise, one turn, while the wheel is still on the ground.

Loosen Lug Nuts

1. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.

A0707000631US

Jack And Tool Assembly

Jacking Locations

1. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.

NOTE:

Depending on vehicle trim level, certain models come equipped with Rock Rails which have a different front lifting point location. Also, the triangular symbols are not visible for this trim package.

Front Lifting Point

Front Lifting Point - Rock Rail

NOTE:

The jack must be placed straight on with handle facing outwards. See the following Front Jacking Location images for reference. The position of the front jack is the same for all trim levels.

Front Jacking Location

Front Jacking Location - Rock Rail

1. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.

CAUTION!

Do NOT raise the vehicle by the body side sill molding. Be sure the jack is placed in the proper engagement location on the inside of the panel. Damage of the vehicle may occur if the procedure is not properly followed.

NOTE:

The rear lifting point location is the same for all trim levels.

Rear Lifting Point

A0707000845US

Rear Lifting Point - Rock Rail

Rear Jacking Location

Rear Jacking Location - Rock Rail

1. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

1. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.

2. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.

CAUTION!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the inflatable spare tire is mounted incorrectly.

Mounting Spare Tire

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury.

1. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
2. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. For correct lug nut torque

page 402. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service station.

Tighten Lug Nuts

1. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
2. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam tray.
3. Remove the small center cap and securely store the road wheel in the cargo area. Turn the fastener clockwise until secured.

Installing Fastener

1. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as soon as possible, properly secure the spare tire with the special wing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N-m), reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray, and latch the rear load floor cover.

NOTE:

Do not drive with the spare tire installed for more than 50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.

JUMP STARTING

If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.

NOTE:

When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.

PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START

The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenger's front seat. There are remote terminals located under the hood to assist in jump starting.

Under Hood Jump Starting Location

Remote Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap)

Remote Negative (-) Post

Jump Starting Remote Posts

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles or disconnected cable ends to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.

See below steps to prepare for jump starting:

1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK (P) and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, apply the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery.

Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.

NOTE:

Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle while making connections.

Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post (exposed metallic/unpainted post of the discharge vehicle) located on the right hand side next to the under-hood fuse box.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury.

334 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

1. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

CAUTION!

Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle engine.

1. Once the engine is started, follow the disconnecting procedure below.

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle have the battery and charging system tested at an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

REFUELING IN EMERGENCY

The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel ➤ page 326 for a Cap-Less Fuel System. If refueling is necessary, while using an approved gas can, insert the refueling funnel into the filler neck opening. Take care to open both flappers with the funnel to avoid spills.

NOTE:

In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.

A0711000013US

Refueling Funnel

Inserting Funnel

CAUTION!

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not "top off" the fuel tank after filling.

Emergency Gas Can Refueling

Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors.

A funnel is provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.

See below steps for refueling:

1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.

2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel nozzle.

3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors open.

4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.

5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to putting back in the spare tire storage area.

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced by an authorized dealer.

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating your engine by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.

NOTE:

There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

• If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.

MANUAL PARK RELEASE

WARNING!

Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake before activating the Manual Park Release. In addition, you should be seated in the driver's seat with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.

In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is available.

Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away from the console hinges.

Manual Park Release Cover

1. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

2. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal latch in towards the tether strap.

Release Latch

1. While the metal latch is in the open position, pull upward on the tether strap until the lever clicks and latches in the released position. The transmission is now out of PARK (P) and the vehicle can be moved.

Released Position

CAUTION!

Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is activated may damage the Manual Park Release mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest.

NOTE:

To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally, firmly apply the parking brake.

To Disengage The Manual Park Release Lever:

1. To disengage the Manual Park Release, apply tension upward while pushing the release latch towards the tether to unlock the lever.

Release Latch

1. Once the tension has been released and the lever has been unlocked, be sure it is stowed properly and locks into position.

Stowed Position

NOTE:

Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back in place.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the accelerator.

NOTE:

Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).

Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.

NOTE:

Push the ESC OFF switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle ➤ page 267. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF switch again to restore ESC On mode.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

CAUTION!

• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When "rocking" a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described on page 163.

NOTE:

Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck ↩ page 170. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs should be fastened over the tires using specific tire tie-down nets. Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.

Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models			Four-Wheel Drive Models Without 4WD low Range	Four-Wheel Drive Models With 4WD low Range
Flat Tow NONE		If transmission is operable:Transmission in NEUTRAL (N)30 mph (48 km/h) max speed30 miles (48 km) max distance	NOT ALLOWED	Detailed Instructions page 163Transmission in PARK (P)Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow	Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
	Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST	METHOD OK BEST METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer's instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition

must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.

If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK (P) in order to move the vehicle ↩ page 336.

CAUTION!

• Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

- When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.

NOTE:

4WD models without 4WD Low range should only be towed with all four wheels OFF the ground.

TWO-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS

FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:

• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N), for instructions on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is off page 336.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).

If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods to tow the vehicle on a flatbed are as follows:

• The front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly
• Using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position with the rear wheels raised when and the front wheels ON the ground.

CAUTION!

• Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km) with rear wheels on the ground can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS

FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer case is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer case may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK ➔ page 163.

Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have no NEUTRAL (N) position, and therefore must be towed with all four wheels OFF the ground.

CAUTION!

• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED

If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be two mounted in the front fascia/bumper and one in the rear fascia/bumper. The rear tow hook will be located on the driver's side of the vehicle.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear tow hook. The tow hook will be located on the driver's side of the rear fascia/bumper.

Front Tow Hooks

NOTE:

For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle.

Rear Tow Hook

CAUTION!

Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)

This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System.

This feature is a communication network that takes effect in the event of an impact → page 301.

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle ↩ page 303.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change.

NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km); 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:

• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire pressures and look for unusual wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights

MAINTENANCE PLAN

Refer to the Maintenance Plans for required maintenance.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

· Change oil and filter.

· Rotate the tires.

NOTE:Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.

· Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.

· Inspect the CV/Universal joints.

· Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.

· Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.

· Inspect exhaust system.

· Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace the engine air cleaner filter, if necessary.

344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11

12 13

14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Additional Inspections

Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X

X X X

X

X

X

Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.

X X

X X X

X

X

X

Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function.

X X

X X X

X

X

X

Inspect transfer case fluid.

X

X

X

X

Additional Maintenance

Replace engine air cleaner filter.

X

X

X

X

X

Replace the cabin air filter.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Replace spark plugs. 1

X

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.

X

X

Replace accessory drive belt. X

Inspect accessory drive belt tensioner and pulley, replace if necessary.

X

Change transfer case fluid. X

Replace PCV valve. X

1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

3.6L ENGINE

1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 – Engine Oil Fill 9 – Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap

5.7L ENGINE

1 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap

CHECKING OIL LEVEL

To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.

There are four possible dipstick types:

• Crosshatched zone.
  • Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
• Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.

NOTE:

Always maintain the oil level within the cross-hatch markings on the dipstick.

Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end of the range marking.

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.

ADDING WASHER FLUID

The instrument cluster display will indicate when the washer fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the "WASHER FLUID LOW" message will be displayed.

The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment; be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.

MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, and periodic maintenance is not required.

WARNING!

- Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps → page 332. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a "fast charger" is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a "fast charger" to provide starting voltage.

PRESSURE WASHING

Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure washer is not recommended.

CAUTION!

Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and connections however, the pressures generated by these machines is such that complete protection against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

ENGINE OIL

Engine Oil Selection

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recommends engine oils that meet the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard. For the proper engine oil selection ↗ page 408.

NOTE:

Hemi engines (5.7L) at times can tick right after startup and then quiet down after approximately 30 seconds. This is normal and will not harm the engine. This characteristic can be caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the vehicle is started then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon restarting, you may experience a ticking sound. Other causes could be if

the vehicle is unused for an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or extended idling. If the engine continues to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on, see the nearest authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol

This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends

API Certified engine oils.

This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Synthetic Engine Oils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.

Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

Materials Added To Engine Oil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

ENGINE OIL FILTER

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified filters should be used.

ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER

For the proper maintenance intervals page 343.

NOTE:

Be sure to follow the "Severe Duty Conditions" maintenance interval if applicable.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified filters should be used.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and Replacement

Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and/or debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris, change the engine air cleaner filter.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal

1. Release the spring clips from the engine air cleaner filter cover.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover

1 – Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 - Spring Clips

1. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the engine air cleaner filter.

2. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing assembly.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly

1 – Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 – Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation

NOTE:

Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present before replacing the engine air cleaner filter.

1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing assembly with the engine air cleaner filter inspection surface facing downward.

2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the housing assembly locating tabs.

3. Latch the spring clips and lock the engine air cleaner filter cover to the housing assembly.

AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE

For best possible performance, the air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

WARNING!

- Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, for further warranty information.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

- The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a — If Equipped

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE:

Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-1234yf — If Equipped

R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE:

Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.

Cabin Air Filter

For the proper maintenance intervals page 343.

WARNING!

Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the blower operating, the blower can contact hands and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.

The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:

1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.

Glove Compartment

1 – Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 - Glove Compartment Door

1. There are glove compartment travel stops on both sides of the glove compartment door, partially close the glove compartment door and push inward to release the glove compartment travel stop on one side and repeat this procedure for the opposite side.
2. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment door toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the glove compartment door from its hinges.

NOTE:

When disengaging the glove compartment door from its hinges, there will be some resistance.

1. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compartment door and lifting the clip out of glove compartment door.

Right Side Of Glove Compartment

1 - Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door

354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

1. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the retaining tab and mid way snap that secures the filter cover to the HVAC housing. Disengage the mid way snap by pulling the door outward. Unhinge the filter cover on the right side to fully remove the cover.

Cabin Air Filter Cover

1 - Retaining Tab
2 - Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge

1. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing.

2. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover.

CAUTION!

The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often.

1. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the door hinge and reattach the tension tether by inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment and sliding the clip away from the face of the glove compartment door.
2. Push the door to the near closed position to reengage the glove compartment travel stops.

NOTE:

Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.

ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. This is not a reason to replace belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be

replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.

Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)

Conditions that would require replacement:

• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips

• "Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain correct position on pulley)

• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before new belt is installed)

• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)

Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment.

Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.

BODY LUBRICATION

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically use a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE:

Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. If chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected periodically, not just when wiper performance problems are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:

• Wear or uneven edges
• Foreign material
• Hardening or cracking
• Deformation or fatigue

If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.

Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

CAUTION!

Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged.

1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.

Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position

1-Wiper
2 - Release Tab
3-Wiper Arm

1. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.

A0804000198US

Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position

1-Wiper Blade
2 - Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm

1. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the wiper

arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade toward the right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper blade from the wiper arm).

Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm

1-Wiper Blade
2 - Release Tab
3-Wiper Arm

1. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.

Installing The Front Wipers

1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper

release tab open and the blade side of the wiper facing up and away from the windshield.

1. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
2. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and snap it into its locked position. Latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible click.
3. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.

Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.

NOTE:

The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.

Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position

1 - Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2-Wiper Arm

1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
2. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm with your right hand. With your left hand, hold the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.

NOTE:

Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap.

Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position

1 - Wiper Blade
2-Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap

1. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.

Installing The Rear Wiper

1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.

NOTE:

The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.

1. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
2. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into place.

EXHAUST SYSTEM

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you ➤ page 317.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

CAUTION!

- The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

- Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to the manufacturer specifications, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

COOLING SYSTEM

WARNING!

• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time, whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.

Engine Coolant Checks

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.

Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill

NOTE:

Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system, please contact an authorized dealer. If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032).

For the proper maintenance intervals page 343.

Selection Of Coolant

For further information ↩ page 408.

NOTE:

- Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not recommended.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:

• We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/ Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34° F ( -37° C) are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/ engine coolant solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

NOTE:

• It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system, please contact a local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank (if equipped).

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow it to remain

in puddles on the ground, clean up any ground spills immediately. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately.

Coolant Level

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.

When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

Cooling System Notes

NOTE:

When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-freeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.

• If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

BRAKE SYSTEM

In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. For the proper maintenance intervals ↩ page 343.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency.

Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder

The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the designated marks on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally low, check the system for leaks. For further information → page 409.

WARNING!

• Use only the manufacturer recommended brake fluid ➕ page 409. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Fluid Level Check

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check the transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Fluid And Filter Changes

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle.

Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

Selection Of Lubricant

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer specified transmission fluid ➞ page 409. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.

NOTE:

No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder ➤ page 409.

FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID

For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons, the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.

Front Axle Fluid Level Check

The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.

The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft lb (30 to 40 N·m).

CAUTION!

Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them and cause them to leak.

Rear Axle Fluid Level Check

The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.

The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft lb (30 to 40 N·m).

CAUTION!

Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them and cause them to leak.

Selection Of Lubricant

Use only the manufacturer recommended fluid page 409.

TRANSFER CASE

Fluid Level Check

For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.

Adding Fluid

With the vehicle in a level position, fill the transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening.

Drain

First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recommended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lb (20 to 34 N·m).

CAUTION!

When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could damage them and cause them to leak.

Selection Of Lubricant

Use only the manufacturer recommended fluid page 409.

FUSES

General Information

WARNING!

• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

If it is necessary to wash the engine compartment, take care not to directly hit the fuse box, and the windshield wiper motors with water.

The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current.

When a device does not work, you must check the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.

Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for extended periods of time with the engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.

Blade Fuses

1-Fuse Element
2 - Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element (blown fuse)

Underhood Fuses

The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment on the passenger's side, directly behind the headlamp. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside

cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.

Power Distribution Center Location

Power Distribution Center

* If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse		Description
F03 60 Amp	Yellow - Radiator Fan *
F05 40 Amp	Green - Compressor for Air Suspension *
F06 40 Amp	Green - Anti-lock Brakes / Electronic Stability		Control Pump
F07 30 Amp	Pink - Starter Solenoid
F09 30 Amp	Pink - Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel Engine Only) / Brake Vacuum Pump
F10 40 Amp	Green - Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2
F11 30 Amp	Pink - Trailer Tow Electric Brake *
F12 40 Amp	Green - Body Controller #3 / Power Locks
F13 40 Amp	Green - Blower Motor Front
F14 40 Amp	Green - Body Controller #4 / Exterior Lighting #1
F15 40 Amp	Green - Low Temperature Radiator (LTR) Engine Cooling Pump *
F17 30 Amp	Pink - Headlamp Washer *
F19 20 Amp	Blue - Headrest Solenoid *
F20 30 Amp	Pink - Passenger Door Module
F22 20 Amp	Blue - Engine Control Module
F23 30 Amp	Pink - Interior Lights #1
F24 30 Amp	Pink - Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp	Pink - Front Wipers
F26 30 Amp	Pink - Anti-lock Brakes / Stability Control Module, ECU and Valves

368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

* If Equipped
Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Micro Fuse	Description
F28 20 Amp	Blue - Trailer Tow Backup Lights *
F29 20 Amp	Blue - Trailer Tow Parking Lights *
F30 30 Amp	Pink - Trailer Tow (Receptacle) / Trailer Tow	(Separate E-Brake) / Trailer Tow (BUX) *
F32 30 Amp	Pink - Drive Train Control Module
F34 30 Amp	Pink - Slip Differential Control *
F35 30 Amp	Pink - Sunroof - If Equipped
F36 30 Amp	Pink - Rear Defroster
F37 25 Amp	Clear - Rear Blower Motor *
F38 30 Amp	Pink - Power Inverter 115 Volt AC *
F39 30 Amp	Pink - Power Liftgate *
F40 - 10 Amp	Red Daytime Running Lights / Headlamp Leveling
F42 - 20 Amp	Yellow Horn
F44 - 10 Amp	Red Diagnostic Port
F45 - 5 Amp	Tan Cyber Security Gateway
F49 - 10 Amp	Red Integrated Central Stack/Climate Control
F50 - 20 Amp	Yellow Air Suspension Control Module/Slip	Differential - If Equipped
F51 - 15 Amp	Blue KIN / RF HUB / Steering Column	Lock *
F53 - 20 Amp	Yellow Trailer Tow - Left Turn / Stop Lights	*
F56 - 15 Amp	Blue Additional Content (Diesel Engine Only)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse		Description
F57 - 20 Amp Yellow NOX Sensor *
F58 - 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps LH *
F59 - 10 Amp Red Purging Pump (Diesel Engine Only)
F60 - 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module
F61 - 10 Amp Red Transmission Control Module / PM Sensor (Diesel Engine Only)
F62 - 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 - 20 Amp Yellow			Ignition Coils / Ignition Coil Capacitors / Short Runner Valve Actuator * (Gas) Urea Heater (Diesel)
F64 - 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors/Powertrain
F66 - 10 Amp Red Sunroof / Rain Sensor / Inside Rear View Mirror / USB Port / DSCR / DTV *
F67 - 15 Amp Blue CD/DVD/UCI Port/USB Charging Port
F68 - 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper Motor
F69 - 15 Amp Blue Spotlight Feed *
F70 - 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F71 - 30 Amp Green Amplifier / ANCM *
F72 - 10 Amp Red ECM
F73 - 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamp RT *
F75 - 10 Amp Red Dual Batt Control *
F76 - 10 Amp Red Electronic Stability Control

370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

* If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse		Description
F77 - 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module / Front Axle			Disconnect Module *
F78 - 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module/Electric Power			Steering
F80 - 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener / Anti-Intrusion Module * / Siren *
F81 - 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn / Stop Lights *
F82 - 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module / Cruise Control / DTV *
F83 - 10 Amp Red Fuel Door
F84 - 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster
F85 - 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 - 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 - 10 Amp Red Air Suspension *
F88 - 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster / SGW / ITBM *
F90/F91 - 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear Seats / Cargo Area) Selectable
F92 - 10 Amp Red Rear Console Lamp *
F93 - 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 - 10 Amp Red Shifter/Transfer Case Module
F95 - 10 Amp Red Rear Camera / Blind Spot Sensor *
F96 - 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch / Flashlamp Charger *
F97 - 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel *
F98 - 20 Amp Yellow Ventilated Seats / Front Heated Seats *
F99 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control / Driver Assistance Systems Module / HALF / Park Assist
F100 – 10 Amp Red Active Damping *
F101 – 15 Amp Blue In Car Temperature Sensor / Humidity Sensor
F102 – 15 Amp Blue Spare
F103 – 10 Amp Red Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only) / Rear HVAC *
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel / Center Console / Rear Cargo *)

CAUTION!

• When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

BULB REPLACEMENT

Replacement Bulbs

NOTE:

See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.

Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Glove Compartment Lamp 194
Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976
Rear Cargo Lamp 214-2
Visor Vanity Lamp V26377
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) 103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp 74
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamps (Low Beam) – If Equipped H11
Premium Headlamps (Low/High Beam) D3S (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Headlamps (High Beam) – If Equipped H9
Premium Park/Turn Signal Lamp LED - (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Premium Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) LED - (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Fog Lamps	H11LED - (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Side Marker – If Equipped W5W
Premium Front Side Marker – If Equipped LED - (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Park/Turn Lamp – If Equipped 7444NA (WY28/8W)
Rear Body Side Backup Lamp 7440 (W21W)
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps LED - (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Liftgate Backup Lamps 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps LED - (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Body Side Stop/Turn Lamps 3157KRD LCP (P27/7W)
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps LED - (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)	LED - (Serviced at an authorized dealer)

Bulb Replacement

High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If Equipped

The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switched off and the key removed. Because of this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See an authorized dealer for service.

NOTE:

On vehicles equipped with (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.

Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped

NOTE:

Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back to vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process.

See below steps to replace:

1. Open the hood.
2. Access the back of the headlamp.
3. The air filter housing must be removed.
4. The windshield washer reservoir may need to be rotated out of the way by removing the fastener.
5. Coolant reservoir (if equipped) will need to be repositioned by removing the fasteners, and moving the unit out of the way.
6. To access the low beam bulb you must remove the rubber boot seal from backside of the lamp housing.

Rubber Boot Seal

NOTE:

Ensure the rubber boot is properly reinstalled to prevent water and moisture from entering the lamp.

CAUTION!

• Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.

• Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring.

• Turn the low or high beam bulb a quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.

• Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.

Front Turn Signal Lamp

See below steps to replace:

1. Open the hood.
2. Access the back of the headlamp.
3. The air filter housing must be removed.
4. The windshield washer reservoir may need to be rotated out of the way by removing the fastener.

5. Coolant reservoir (if equipped) will need to be repositioned by removing the fasteners, and moving the unit out of the way.

6. Turn the turn signal bulb a quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.

7. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

Front Fog Lamps

Please see an authorized dealer for service on LED and Halogen front fog lamps.

Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps

See below steps to replace:

1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.

A0705000372U5
Tail Lamp Push Pins

1. Grab the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
2. Twist socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp.

376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Rear Of Tail Lamp

1 - Rear Turn/Stop Bulb Socket
2 - LED Tail Connector - Do Not Remove
3 - Backup Bulb Socket

1. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.

2. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the lamp assembly.

Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp

Rear Liftgate Tall Lamps

See below steps to replace:

1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a suitable tool to pry the lower trim from the liftgate.

Liftgate Lower Trim

1. Continue removing the trim.
2. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
3. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counterclockwise.

Rear Of Liftgate Tail Lamp

1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
2 - Backup Bulb Socket

1. Remove/replace bulb(s).
2. Reinstall the socket(s).
3. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.

Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)

The (CHMSL) is an LED. Service at an authorized dealer.

Rear License Lamp

The rear license lamps are LEDs. See an authorized dealer for service.

TIRES

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.

Tire Markings

Tire Markings

1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 - Service Description
4 – Maximum Load
5 – Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter "T" or "S" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing is based on US design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or

"...blank..." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or

T or S = Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

• Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code

• "R" means radial construction, or

• "D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service Description:

95 = Load IndexA numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed SymbolA symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditionsThe maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

Load Identification:Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, orLL = Light load tire orC, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load - Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure - Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of TransportationThis symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)03 means the 3rd week

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)01 means the year 2001Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-pillar	The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure	Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure	The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure	The manufacturers’ recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard	A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

NOTE:

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.

Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)

Tire And Loading Information Placard

811b6a9a

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard → page 152.

NOTE:

Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded.

For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and trailer towing → page 152.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs" on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Metric Example For Load Limit

For example, if "XXX" amount equals 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

Occupants			Combined weight ofoccupants and cargofrom Tire Placard	MINUS	Combined Occupant'sweight	=	AVAILABLECargo/Luggage andTrailer Tongueht
TOTAL	FRONT	REAR
EXAMPLE 1					Occupant 1: 200 lbsOccupant 2: 130 lbsOccupant 3: 160 lbsOccupant 4: 100 lbsOccupant 5: 80 lbsTOTAL WEIGHT: 670 lbs
5	2	3	865 lbs	minus	670 lbs	=	195 lbs
EXAMPLE 2			EXAMPLE
3	2	1	865 lbs	minus	Occupant 1: 210 lbsOccupant 2: 180 lbsOccupant 3: 150 lbsTOTAL WEIGHT: 540 lbs
EXAMPLE 3			865 lbs	minus	540 lbs	=	325 lbs
2	2	0	865 lbs	minus	Occupant 1: 200 lbsOccupant 2: 200 lbsTOTAL WEIGHT: 400 lbs

Occupant 1: 200 lbs
Occupant 2: 130 lbs.
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupation: 100 lbs
40 lbs
TOTAL MEIGERS 670 IE
1970

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

• Safety
• Fuel Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability

Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68° F ( 20° C) and the outside temperature = 32° F ( 0° C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F ( 7° C) for this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires.

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a 1/4 of an inch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to be reused.

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire condition, please replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to be reused when driven under Run Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.

NOTE:

TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on a flat tire condition ➤ page 281.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping ➤ page 338.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

1 – Worn Tire
2 - New Tire

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

NOTE:

Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed ➤ page 389. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall.

For more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire ➤ page 379.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle's handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

- Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

TIRE TYPES

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40° F ( 5° C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do

so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.

SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to "Tire Service Kit" in "In Case Of Emergency" for further information.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.

For restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated for temporary emergency use → page 160.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter "T" or "S" preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped

The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.

Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.

WARNING!

Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.

WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch.

The wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel's protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.

CAUTION!

Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

NOTE:

If you intend parking or storing the vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive the vehicle and apply the brakes to remove the water droplets from the brake components. This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.

Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels

CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.

SNOW TRACTION DEVICES

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage:

• Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
• No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.

- Please follow the table below for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:

4x2Trim Level	Axle Tire/Wheel Size		Snow Traction Device(maximum projection beyond tire profile or equivalent)
LAREDOLIMITED	Rear	265/60R18265/50R20	THULE XG-12 PRO or Equivalent
OVERLANDSUMMIT		265/50R20
4x4Trim Level	Axle Tire/Wheel Size		Snow Traction Device(maximum projection beyond tire profile or equivalent)
LAREDO	Rear	P265/60R18265/50R20	THULE XG-12 PRO or Equivalent
LIMITEDOVERLAND		P265/60R18265/60R18265/50R20
SUMMIT 265/50R20
TRAILHAWK 265/60R18

WARNING!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions:

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

- Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not require retightening.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer's instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer's if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

For the proper maintenance intervals

page 343. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

NOTE:

The Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.

The suggested rotation method is the "rearward-cross" shown in the following diagram.

055703771

Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

TREADWEAR

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and

may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

TRACTION GRADES

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

TEMPERATURE GRADES

The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

STORING THE VEHICLE

If you are storing your vehicle for more than three weeks, we recommend that you take the following steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:

• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

BODYWORK

PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne

contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

● Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
- Stone and gravel impact.
- Insects, tree sap and tar.
- Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
- Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE

Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

PRESERVING THE BODYWORK

Washing

- Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar® Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

INTERIORS

SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS

Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).

PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS

Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

CAUTION!

• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.

LEATHER SURFACES

Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.

The leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.

NOTE:

If equipped with light colored leather it may show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning, and the manufacturer recommends Mopar® Total Clean leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.

CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may result.

GLASS SURFACES

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

The VIN is found on a label located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield.

Windshield VIN Label Location

NOTE:

It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench using a six sided (hex) deep wall socket.

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Lug Nut/Bolt Torque	**Lug Nut/ Bolt Size	Lug Nut/Bolt Socket Size
130 Ft-Lb (176 N·m)	M14 x 1.50 22	mm

**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

Wheel Mounting Surface

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/ bolt (do not insert it half way).

NOTE:

If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or service station.

After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly tightened.

Torque Patterns

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

While operating on gasoline with the required octane number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended octane number can cause engine failure and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

404 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3.6L ENGINE

Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than 15% in this engine.

This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide optimum fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded “Regular” gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.

5.7L ENGINE

Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than 15% in this engine.

This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane "Plus" gasoline is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.

REFORMULATED GASOLINE

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as "Reformulated Gasoline". Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.

MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.

Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system

deposits. When available, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.

GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).

Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and not covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Do Not Use E-85 IN Non-FLEX FUEL VEHICLES

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• Operate in a lean mode.
  • OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS

Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN GASOLINE

MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.

FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle's performance:

• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

- The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

FLUID CAPACITIES

	US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 24.6 Gallons 93.1 Liters
5.7L Engine 24.6 Gallons 93.1 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine 10.4 Quarts 9.9 Liters
5.7L Engine - Without Trailer Tow Package 15.4 Quarts 14.6 Liters
5.7L Engine - With Trailer Tow Package 16 Quarts 15.2 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant	We recommend you use Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil - 3.6L Engine	We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar®, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil - 5.7L Engine	We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar®, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter	We recommend you use Mopar® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection - 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol	(Do Not Use E-85).
Fuel Selection - 5.7L Engine	89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).

CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission	Use only Mopar® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case - Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I) We recommend you use Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353.
Transfer Case - Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II) We recommend you use Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front)	We recommend you use Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) - With Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)	We recommend you use Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier.
Axle Differential (Rear) - Without Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)	We recommend you use Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Brake Master Cylinder	We recommend you use Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used.

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE

PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT

All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.

PREPARE A LIST

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS

If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges may apply).

If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer's service manager first. If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the FCA US LLC's Customer Assistance center.

Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer center should include the following information:

• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office)
• Authorized dealer name
  • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
  ● Vehicle delivery date and mileage

FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER

P.O. Box 21-8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321-8004

Phone: [phone]

FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: [phone] English /

[phone] French

MEXICO

In Mexico City: 800-505-1300

Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568

PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS

FCA Caribbean LLC

P.O. Box 191857

San Juan 00919-1857

Phone: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the FCA US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.

SERVICE CONTRACT

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection beyond your vehicle's warranty. If you purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the FCA US LLC's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call [phone] English / [phone] French).

FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for further information.

Use this QR code to access your digital experience.

MOPAR® PARTS

Mopar® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND WASHINGTON, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately

inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, an authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:

1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

IN CANADA

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP.

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below.

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components and is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

To order a hard copy of your Service or

Diagnostic Procedure manuals, visit:

www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).

Owner's Manuals

These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.

To access your Owner's Information online, visit www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).

Or

Call Tech Authority toll free at:

• 1-800-890-4038 (US)

Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:

• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)

414 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

GENERAL INFORMATION

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

INDEX

Android Auto™ 219

Apple CarPlay® 222

Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A

Mobile Phone 210

WARRANTY INFORMATION 412

A

About Your Brakes....402

ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control 122

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 122

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) 360

Adding Fuel 151

Additives, Fuel 404

Adjust

Forward 35

Rearward.... 35

Advance Phone Connectivity 217

Air Bag

Air Bag Operation 297

Air Bag Warning Light 294

Driver Knee Air Bag 297

Enhanced Accident Response ..... 301, 341

Event Data Recorder (EDR) 341

Front Air Bag 295

If Deployment Occurs ....301

Knee Impact Bolsters 297

Maintaining Your Air Bag System 302

Maintenance 302

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light 295

Side Air Bags 297

Transporting Pets 317

Air Bag Light 294,317

Air Cleaner, Engine

(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) 351

Air Conditioner Maintenance 352

Air Conditioner Refrigerant 352

Air Conditioner System 352

Air Conditioning Filter 61, 351, 353

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips 60

Air Filter 351

Air Pressure

Tires 387

Alarm

Arm The System 22, 23

Disarm The System ......22

Rearm The System 23

Security Alarm 21,91

Alterations/Modifications

Vehicle....10

Ambient Light 53

Android Auto 219, 221

Android Auto™ 219

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) 360, 407

Disposal 361

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) 265

Anti-Lock Warning Light 91

Apple CarPlay 219, 223

Apple CarPlay® 222

Assist, Hill Start 271

Audio Settings 203

Audio Systems (Radio) 173

Auto Down Power Windows 67

Auto Up Power Windows 67

Automatic Dimming Mirror 42

Automatic Door Locks 27

Automatic Headlights ....50

Automatic High Beams 50

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .....59

Automatic Transmission 99, 107

Adding Fluid 364

Fluid And Filter Change 364

Fluid Change 364

Fluid Level Check 363, 364

Fluid Type 364, 409

Gear Ranges 108

Special Additives 363

Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ....110

AutoPark 100

Auxiliary Driving Systems 275

Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) 64

Auxiliary Power Outlet 64

Axle Fluid 409

B

Battery....89,348

Charging System Light 89

Keyless Key Fob Replacement 15

Battery Saver Feature ....52

Belts, Seat 317

Blind Spot Monitoring 275

Bluetooth

Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing....212

Body Mechanism Lubrication ....355

B-Pillar Location 383

Brake Assist System 266

Brake Control System, Electronic ....266

Brake Fluid 363,409

Brake System 363,402

Anti-Lock (ABS) 402

Fluid Check 363

Master Cylinder 363

Parking 103

Warning Light 88

Brake/Transmission Interlock 106

Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle .... 103

Bulb Replacement 372

Bulbs, Light 319

C

Camera, Rear.... 149

Capacities, Fluid 407

Caps, Filler

Oil (Engine) 346

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) 361

Car Washes.... 399

Carbon Monoxide Warning 319, 320

Cargo Area Cover 75,76

Cargo Compartment 75

Cargo Tie-Downs 76

CD....205

Cellular Phone 260

Certification Label 152

Chains, Tire 395

Changing A Flat Tire 325

Chart, Tire Sizing 379

Check Engine Light (Malfunction

Indicator Light)....98

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 317

Checks, Safety 317

Child Restraint 304

Child Restraints

Booster Seats 306

Child Seat Installation 314

How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ..... 312

Infant And Child Restraints 305

LATCH Positions 308

Lower Anchors And Tethers

For Children 308

Older Children And Child Restraints 306

Seating Positions 307

Clean Air Gasoline 404

Cleaning

Wheels.... 393

Climate Control ....56

Cold Weather Operation 102

Compact Spare Tire 391

Connected Services 224

Connected Services FAQ 245

Connected Services Features 229

Connected Services, Getting Started 226

Connected Services, Introduction 225

Console

Storage....62

Console, Overhead 63

Contract, Service 411

Controls 195

Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) 361

Cooling System....359

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) 360

Coolant Level 362

Cooling Capacity 407

Disposal Of Used Coolant ....361

Drain, Flush, And Refill ....360

Inspection 360,362

Points To Remember 362

Pressure Cap 361

Radiator Cap 361

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) 360, 407, 408

Corrosion Protection 398

Cruise Control 122

Cruise Light 95, 96

Customer Assistance ....410

Cybersecurity 173

D Daytime Running Lights.... 49

Dealer Service ....349

Defroster, Windshield ....318

De-Icer, Remote Start 21

Deleting A Phone 212

Diagnostic System, Onboard 97

Dimmer Control Switch 53

Dipsticks Oil (Engine) 348

Disabled Vehicle Towing 338

Disc Drive 205

Disconnecting 212

Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) 361

Disturb 215

Door Ajar....89, 90

Door Ajar Light 89, 90

Door Locks Automatic 27

Drag & Drop 193

Driver Memory Presets 202

Driver's Seat Back Tilt 31

Driving 167

DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) 250

E Economy (Fuel) Mode .... 106

Electric Brake Control System 266

Anti-Lock Brake System 265

Electronic Roll Mitigation 267, 274

Electric Remote Mirrors 43

Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .....64

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..... 123

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 267

Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .....89

Emergency Gas Can Refueling 334

Emergency, In Case Of

Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 338

Hazard Warning Flasher 321

Jacking.... 325

Jump Starting 332

Tow Hooks 341

Emission Control System Maintenance .....98

Engine 346

Air Cleaner 351

Block Heater 102

Break-In Recommendations 103

Checking Oil Level 348

Compartment 346, 347

Compartment Identification ...... 346, 347

Coolant (Antifreeze) 408

Cooling.... 359

Exhaust Gas Caution 319, 320

Fails To Start 102

Flooded, Starting 102

Fuel Requirements 404

Jump Starting 332

Oil 349,407,408

Oil Filler Cap 346

Oil Filter 350

Oil Reset 82

Oil Selection 349, 407

Oil Synthetic 350

Overheating 335

Starting 99

Enhanced Accident Response

Feature 301, 341

Ethanol 405

Exhaust Gas Cautions 319, 320

Exhaust System 319, 358

Exterior Lights 49,319

F

Family Alerts 243

Filters

Air Cleaner....351

Air Conditioning 61, 351, 353

Engine Oil 350,408

Engine Oil Disposal 350

Flashers....321

Hazard Warning 321

Turn Signals 96, 319, 375

Flash-To-Pass ....50

Flooded Engine Starting 102

Fluid Capacities 407

Fluid Leaks 319

Fluid Level Checks

Brake 363

Engine Oil 348

Fluid, Brake 409

Fog Lights 51

Fold-Flat Seats 31

Forward Collision Warning 279

Four Wheel Drive 112, 119

Operation 112

System 112

Four Wheel Drive Operation 112

Four-Way Hazard Flasher 321

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 338

Front Axle (Differential) 364

Fuel 403,404

Adding 151

Additives 404

Clean Air 404

Economy Mode 106

Ethanol 405

Gasoline 403,404

Light 92

Materials Added 404

Methanol 405

Octane Rating 403, 404, 408

Requirements 404

Tank Capacity 407

Fueling 151

Fuses 365

G

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)......45

Gasoline, (Fuel) 403

Gasoline, Clean Air 404

Gasoline, Reformulated 404

Gear Ranges 108

Glass Cleaning 401

Glove Compartment Storage 62

Gross Axle Weight Rating 154

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 153

GVWR 152

H

Hazard Warning Flashers 321

Head Restraints 38

Head Rests 38

Headlights

Cleaning 399

Delay 51

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .....50

Lights On Reminder 51

On With Wipers 50

Passing 50

Switch 49

Heated Mirrors 45

Heated Seats 36

Heated Steering Wheel 28, 29

Heater, Engine Block 102

Hill Descent Control 270

Hill Descent Control Indicator 270

Hill Start Assist 271

Hitches

Trailer Towing 156

HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) 45

Hood

Closing 73

Opening 72

Hood Prop....72

Hood Release 72

|

Ignition 17

Switch 17

Inside Rearview Mirror 42,321

Instrument Cluster

Descriptions....96

Display 80

Engine Oil Reset 82

Menu Items 83

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 401

Interior Appearance Care ....400

Interior Lights 52

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) 54

Inverter

Power 66

iPod Control 63

iPod/USB/MP3 Control 63

Bluetooth Streaming Audio 63

J

Jack Location 326

Jack Operation 325, 327

Jacking Instructions 327

Jump Starting 332

K

Key Fob

Arm The System 22

Disarm The System 22

Programming Additional Key Fobs ......16

Key Fob Battery Service

(Remote Keyless Entry) 15

Key Fob Programming

(Remote Keyless Entry)....16

Keyless Enter-N-Go 24

Passive Entry 24

Keys....14

Replacement 16

L

Lane Change Assist ....52

LaneSense 146

Lap/Shoulder Belts 287

Latches 319

Hood....72

Lead Free Gasoline 404

Leaks, Fluid 319

Life Of Tires 389

Liftgate 73

Closing....74

Opening 73

Power 74

Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer 56

Light Bulbs 319

Lights 319

4WD Low 95

Air Bag 88,294,317

Air Suspension 94, 95

Air Suspension Entry Exit 94

Ambient 53

Automatic Headlights ....50

Brake Assist Warning 269

Brake Warning 88

Bulb Replacement 372

Courtesy/Reading 52

Cruise 95, 96

Daytime Running 49

Dimmer Switch, Headlight 53

Electric Power Steering 89

Electronic Stability Control 91

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

Indicator....90

Exterior 49,319

Fog....51,95

Forward Collision Warning 95

Hazard Warning Flasher 321

Headlights On With Wipers 50

High Beam 97

High Beam/Low Beam Select 49, 50

Hill Descent Control 96

Hill Descent Control Indicator 270

Interior 52

LaneSense 92, 95, 96

Lights On Reminder 51

Low Fuel 92

Low Washer Fluid 92

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..... 92

Map 53

NEUTRAL 95

Oil Temperature 90

Park....50,95

Passing....50

Reading 53

Seat Belt Reminder 90

Security Alarm 91

Select Speed Control 96

Service 372

Service 4WD 93

Service Adaptive Cruise Control 91

Service Forward Collision Warning ...... 93

Service LaneSense 92

Service Stop Start 93

Side Marker....375

Snow 95

Sport 95

Stop Start 95

Tow....96

Track 96

Traction Control 269

Transmission Temperature 90

Turn Signals 51, 96, 319, 375

Vanity Mirror 43

Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions ....90, 96

Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ....86

Load Shed Battery Saver On 86

Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction .....86

Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor 86

Loading Vehicle 152

Tires 383

Locks

Automatic Door 27

Child Protection 27

Power Door 24

Lubrication, Body 355

Lug Nuts/Bolts 402

Luggage Carrier 77

M Maintenance....70,72

Maintenance Free Battery 348

Maintenance Schedule 342

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .....92

Manual Service 413

Media Mode 205

Memory Feature (Memory Seats) 30

Memory Seat 30

Methanol.... 405

Mirrors 42

Automatic Dimming 42

Electric Remote 43

Exterior Folding 43

Heated 45

Outside 43

Rearview 42,321

Vanity....43

Modifications/Alterations Vehicle....10

Monitor, Tire Pressure System 281

Mopar Parts 412

Multi-Function Control Lever 49

N New Vehicle Break-In Period.... 103

0 Occupant Restraints .... 285

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) 403, 404

Oil Filter, Change 350

Oil Filter, Selection 350

Oil Pressure Light 90

Oil Reset 82

Oil, Engine 349, 408

Capacity 407

Checking 348

Dipstick 348

Disposal 350

Filter 350,408

Filter Disposal 350

Identification Logo 350

Materials Added To 350

Pressure Warning Light 90

Recommendation 349, 407

Synthetic 350

Viscosity 407

Onboard Diagnostic System 97

Operating Precautions 97

Operator Manual

Owner's Manual 413

Outside Rearview Mirrors 43

Overhead Console 63

Overheating, Engine ....335

P

Paddle Shifters ....111

Paint Care 398

Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A

Mobile Phone ¹ 210

Parking Brake 103

ParkSense Active Park Assist ....142

ParkSense System, Rear 135

Passive Entry 24

Personalized Main Menu Bar 193

Pets 317

Phone Mode 207

Pinch Protection 70, 72

Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...... 383

Power

Brakes 402

Distribution Center (Fuses) 366

Door Locks 24

Inverter 66

Mirrors 43

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) 64

Seats 35

Steering 120

Sunroof....69,70

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .....29

Windows 67

Power Seats

Forward 35

Rearward 35

Recline 35

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts 291

Preparation For Jacking 325

Presets 202

Pretensioners

Seat Belts 291

Q

Quadra-Lift 115

Quadra-Trac 112, 113

R

Radial Ply Tires 388

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) 361

Radio

Presets 202

Radio Controls 195

Radio Mode.... 195

Radio Operation 195,260

Radio Remote Controls 194

Rain Sensitive Wiper System 55

Rear Axle (Differential) 364

Rear Camera 149

Rear Cross Path 278

Rear ParkSense System 135

Rear Wiper/Washer 56

Rearview Mirror 42

Reclining Front Seats ....32

Recreational Towing 163

Reformulated Gasoline 404

Refrigerant 352

Registering SiriusXM Guardian 226

Release, Hood 72

Reminder, Seat Belt 286

Remote Control

Starting System....18

Remote Features,

Door Lock/Unlock 234,245

Remote Features, Horn And Lights 235

Remote Features, Starting 234, 247

Remote Keyless Entry.... 14

Arm The Alarm 22

Disarm The Alarm 22

Programming Additional Key Fobs ...... 16

Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .....194

Remote Starting

Exit Remote Start Mode 20

Remote Starting System 18

Replacement Bulbs 372

Replacement Keys 16

Replacement Tires 389

Reporting Safety Defects 412

Restraints, Child ....304

Restraints, Head 38

Retractable Cargo Area Cover 76

Roadside Assistance 235, 246

Roll Over Warning 9

Roof Luggage Rack 77

Rotation, Tires 397

S

Safety 193

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 317

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 319

Safety Defects, Reporting 412

Safety Features 193

Safety Information, Tire 377

Safety Tips 317

Safety, Exhaust Gas 319

Satellite Radio 197

Saved Radio Stations 202

Schedule, Maintenance 342

Seat Belt Reminder 90

Seat Belts 286,317

Adjustable Shoulder Belt 289

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 289

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage....289

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) 291

Child Restraints 304

Energy Management Feature 291

Extender 290

Front Seat....286, 287, 288

Inspection.... 317

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation 288

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting 289

Lap/Shoulder Belts 287

Operating Instructions 288

Pregnant Women 291

Pretensioners 291

Rear Seat 287

Reminder...... 286

Seat Belt Extender 290

Seat Belt Pretensioner 291

Untwisting Procedure 289

Seat Belts Maintenance 400

Seats....31, 35, 36

Adjustment 31, 35

Easy Entry 36

Head Restraints ....38

Heated 36

Rear Folding 31

Reclining 32

Seatback Release ....31

Tilting 31

Vented 37

Ventilated 37

Security Alarm 21,91

Arm The System ....22

Disarm The System ......22

Selec-Terrain 119

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) 408

Send & Go....236, 246

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) 16

Sentry Key Replacement 16

Service Assistance 410

Service Contract 411

Service Manuals 413

Settings, Audio 203

Shifting.... 105

Automatic Transmission 105, 107

Shoulder Belts 287

Signals, Turn 96, 319, 375

Sirius Satellite Radio 197

Favorites 200

Replay.... 198

SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM 200
Favorites 200
Replay 198
Smart Watch 244
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) 395
Snow Tires 391
SOS Call 229,245
Spare Tires 327, 391, 392, 393
Speed Control Accel/Decel....124
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) 129
Cancel 124
Resume 124
Set....123
Speed Control (Cruise Control) 123
Starting 99
Button 17
Cold Weather 102
Engine Block Heater 102
Engine Fails To Start ....102
Remote 18
Starting And Operating 99
Starting Procedures 99
Steering Power ....120
Tilt Column 28, 29
Wheel, Heated 28, 29
Wheel, Tilt 28, 29
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ....194

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ..... 194

Stolen Vehicle Assistance 240, 246

Storage 62

Console 62

Door 62

Glove Compartment 62

Sunglasses 63

Storage Bin 75

Storage, Vehicle 60, 398

Store Radio Presets 202

Storing Your Vehicle 398

Sun Roof 69,70,72

Opening....69,71

Venting 70,72

Sun Visor 43

Sunglasses Storage 63

Sunshade Operation 70,71

Sway Control, Trailer 274

Synthetic Engine Oil 350

System, Remote Starting 18

T

Telescoping Steering Column ......28, 29

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .....59

Tie Down Hooks, Cargo 76

Tilt Steering Column 28, 29

Tire And Loading Information Placard ...... 383

Tire Markings 378

Tire Safety Information 377

Tires 319, 386, 391, 397

Aging (Life Of Tires) 389

Air Pressure 386

Chains 395

Changing 325

Compact Spare 391

General Information 386, 391

High Speed 387

Inflation Pressure 387

Jacking.... 325

Life Of Tires 389

Load Capacity 383

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)....93,281

Quality Grading 397

Radial 388

Replacement 389

Rotation 397

Safety 377,386

Sizes 379

Snow Tires 391

Spare Tires 327, 391, 392, 393

Spinning 388

Trailer Towing 160

Tread Wear Indicators 389

Wheel Nut Torque 402

To Open Hood 72

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight 159

Tow Hooks Emergency 341

Towing.... 153,338

Disabled Vehicle 338

Guide....157

Recreational 163

Weight 157

Towing Behind A Motorhome ....163

Traction Control 274

Trailer Sway Control (TSC) 274

Trailer Towing 153

Hitches 156

Minimum Requirements 159

Tips 162

Trailer And Tongue Weight 159

Wiring 161

Trailer Towing Guide ....157

Trailer Weight 157

Transfer Case 365

Fluid 409

Maintenance 365

Transmission 107

Automatic 107,363

Fluid 409

Maintenance 363

Shifting 105

Transporting Pets ....317

Tread Wear Indicators 389

Trip Computer 87

Turn Signals....51, 96, 375

U

Uconnect Phone Call Features 214

Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone.... 217

Uconnect App 226

Uconnect Phone 209, 210, 211

Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call Currently In Progress .... 215

Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call Currently In Progress.... 215

Bluetooth Communication Link 219

Call Continuation 217

Call Controls 214

Call Termination 216

Cancel Command 210

Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing 212

Help Command 210

Join Calls 216

Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite 213

Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress 216

Managing Your Favorites 214

Natural Speech 209

Operation 209

Overview 207

Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A

Mobile Phone 210

Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio

Device 211

Phonebook Download 213

Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold 216

Power-Up 219

Recent Calls.... 215

Redial 216

To Remove A Favorite 214

Toggling Between Calls 216

Touch-Tone Number Entry 215

Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone 217

Voice Command 217

Uconnect Settings Customer Programmable Features ....24

Passive Entry Programming ......24

Uconnect System 191

Uconnect Voice Command 40

Uniform Tire Quality Grades 397

Unleaded Gasoline 404

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt 289

v

Vanity Mirrors 43

Vehicle Finder 238, 246

Vehicle Health Alert 241

Vehicle Health Report 241

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 402

Vehicle Loading 152,383

Vehicle Maintenance ....349

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations 10

Vehicle Notifications 242

Vehicle Storage 60,398

Voice Command 221, 223

Voice Recognition System (VR) 40

w

Warning Flashers, Hazard 321

Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster

Descriptions)....92

Warnings, Roll Over 9

Warranty Information 412

WARRANTY INFORMATION 📄 412

Washers, Windshield 54, 348

Washing Vehicle 399

Wheel And Wheel Tire Care 393

Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim 393

Wi-Fi....239

Wind Buffeting 68

Window Fogging 60

Windows Power......67

Windshield Defroster 318

Windshield Washers 54,348 Fluid 348

Windshield Wiper Blades 355

Windshield Wipers ....54

Wipers Blade Replacement 355

Wipers, Intermittent ....54

Wipers, Rain Sensitive ....55

The driver's primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver's responsibility to comply with all local laws.

This Owner's Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.

Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep brand dealer.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don't drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

Jeep.

Whether it's providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle's heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you'll find the app an important extension of your Jeep brand vehicle.

Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword "JEEP" (U.S. residents only).

U. S.

mopar.com/om

DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER'S MANUAL, RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS

Canada

owners.mopar.ca

App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.

Second Edition

21 WK OM EN USC